Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 515

Home page for Customer Training Page 1 of 1

Damatic DNA/XD Basic Course


for APSS

 
  Course Documents

Mimic Hierarchy

Project Doc. & Manuals

© Copyright CAE Valmarine AS


Last updated: 02/7 - 2003.
 

file://\\apssdata1\tecnico\80 Training Course\10 Valmarine\Valmarine\Course\INDEX... 13/04/2011


INDEX

Chapter 1 Introduction to Company and Damatic DNA


1.1 Introduction
1.2 Abbreviations
Chapter 2 System Communication
2.1 Process Bus & Controll Room Bus DNA
2.2 System Bus XD
2.3 Field Bus
2.4 Ship Specific Drawing MAS
2.5 Ship Specific Drawing HVAC
Chapter 3 Stations Functionality and Construction
3.1 DNA Control room stations
3.2 XD Control room stations
3.3 XD Station Card
3.4 ACN
Chapter 4 I/O Card
4.1 I/O Basic Module and Connection Principle
4.2 Cards Overview, Details and Connection Principles
4.3 Explanation of the Terminal Board number
4.3.1 Example of the Terminalboard List
4.3.2 Example of the Instrument List
Chapter 5 Power Supply/Batteries
5.1 Power Supply and BTMU XD
5.2 Power Supply and battery DNA
Chapter 6 Extension Alarm System.

Chapter 7 System Maintenance


7.1 Maintenance Manual
Chapter 8 Trouble Shooting
8.1 Diagnostic Alarms and Signal Faults DNA
8.2 Diagnostic Alarms and Signal Fault XD
Chapter 9 Operation and General Function Description
9.1 General Function Description
9.1.1 Valves
9.1.2 Pumps
9.1.3 Controllers
9.1.4 Diesel Starter
9.1.5 PMS
Chapter 10 APIS
New Page 1 Page 1 of 2

[_borders/top.htm]

Chapter    1   Introduction to Company and Damatic DNA


                1.1     Introduction
                1.2    Abbreviations
                       

Chapter    2   System Communication


                2.1    Process Bus  & Controll Room Bus DNA
                2.2   System Bus XD 
                2.3    Field Bus
                2.4   Ship Specific Drawing MAS
                2.5   Ship Specific Drawing HVAC    

               

Chapter    3  Stations Functionality and Construction


                3.1     DNA Control room stations
                3.2    XD Control room stations
                3.3    XD Station Card                 
                3.4    ACN                
               

Chapter    4     I/O Card 


                4.1    I/O Basic Module and Connection Principle
                4.2    Cards Overview, Details and Connection Principles
                4.3    Explanation of the Terminal Board number  
                         4.3.1    Example of the Terminalboard List
                         4.3.2    Example of the Instrument List 

Chapter    5    Power Supply/Batteries 


                       5.1 Power Supply and BTMU XD
                       5.2 Power Supply and battery DNA               

Chapter    6    Extension Alarm System.


                                                                    
Chapter    7    System Maintenance
                      7.1    Maintenance Manual                      

Chapter    8    Trouble Shooting


               8.1    Diagnostic Alarms and Signal Faults DNA
               8.2   Diagnostic Alarms and Signal Fault XD

file://\\apssdata1\tecnico\80 Training Course\10 Valmarine\Valmarine\Course\INDEX... 13/04/2011


New Page 1 Page 2 of 2

Chapter   9    Operation and General Function Description


                        9.1    General Function Description
                       9.1.1    Valves
                       9.1.2    Pumps
                       9.1.3    Controllers
                       9.1.4    Diesel Starter
                       9.1.5    PMS  

Chapter  10    APIS
                       

file://\\apssdata1\tecnico\80 Training Course\10 Valmarine\Valmarine\Course\INDEX... 13/04/2011


Valmarine

Damatic
p Automation System
Ship y

For Customers concerned with


Quality and Safety
Valmarine Hi t
History off CAE V
Valmarine
l i
-1979 Valmet Automation OY (Finland) established
Valmet Automation Norway targeting the Norwegian
process industry
industry. After a few years the focus was
moved to the marine ship automation market.
-1983 The first Damatic Classic integrated ship automation
system was successfully commissioned.
-1990 Danish company Lyngsoe Marine acquires a majority
of the shares, and company is named Lyngsoe
Lyngsoe--Valmet
Marine..
Marine
-1993 The next generation Damatic system, Damatic XD is
delivered.
-1994 All shares acquired by Lyngsoe Marine, company
named Lyngsoe Marine Norway.
Norway. The same year
Lyngsoe Marine merges into STN Atlas.
2
Valmarine Hi t
History off CAE V
Valmarine
l i
-1997 Management by-
by-out of the Norwegian part of the
company. Company named Valmarine AS. AS.
-2001 CAE inc.
inc acquires Valmarine AS.
AS Company named
CAE Valmarine AS.
-2001 Damatic DNA
DNA,, which is third generation Damatic
automation system, is launched in the marine market.

3
Valmarine Damatic Ship Automation Systems
Damatic ”Classic”
Classic Damatic ”XD”
XD
Ê First time delivered to the Ê Introduced in 1993
marine market in 1983
Ê Unrivalled redundancy
Ê Was the first ”integrated” concept
ship automation system in
Ê Backup and redundancy for
the market
all critical components
Ê Approximately 270 (single failure concept)
deliveries
Ê Approximately 150
deliveries

Damatic ”DNA”
Ê State of the art ship
p automation system
y
Ê Built upon experiene from Classic and XD
Ê First delivery in 2002
Ê 21 system are delivered or under construction 4
Valmarine CAE
Ê CAE is a global leader in providing advanced simulation and
controls equipment and integrated training solutions for
customers in the civil aviation,
aviation military and marine markets.
markets
With annual revenues in excess of $1 billion, CAE employs
more than 6,000 people in Canada, the United States and
around the globe.

Commercial Simulation and


Training

Military Simulation and


Control

5
Valmarine CAE

Ê Founded in 1947
1947, CAE is a widely held public
company listed on the Toronto Stock Exchange
(TSE) trading under the symbol “CAE”
(TSE), CAE
Ê Market Capital: $3.2 billion
Ê Headquartered in Canada with operations on four
continents
Ê Employs more than 6,000 people with approximately
,
4,000 at CAE’s main facilityy in Montreal,, Canada

6
Valmarine CAE organisation
i ti

CAE Inc.

COMMERCIAL SIMULATION MILITARY SIMULATION


& TRAINING & CONTROLS

TRAINING SYSTEMS TRAINING CENTERS MILITARY FLIGHT MARINE SYSTEMS

Canada Spain Montreal, Canada Montreal, Canada


Montreal,, Canada
USA Singapore
Si T
Tampa, Florida
Fl id D
Drammen, N
Norway
Netherlands Italy Stolberg, Germany Sussex, UK
Belgium Brazil Silverwater, Australia Hamburg, Germany
Portugal UAE Burgess Hill, UK Leesburg, USA
RAF Benson
Benson, UK Bangalore India
Bangalore,

7
Valmarine Organization of CAE Valmarine
Valmarine AS
President & CEO

Executive assistant Quality Assurance

Sales & Marketing Technical dept.


dept Finance & Office Adm.
Adm
dept. dept.

Marketing Project Project Service Product & Training Technical Finland office Accounts
Managers Engineering Technical operation

Sales IT

Technical Sales Office Adm.

Project Controller

8
Valmarine P d t range
Product

• Integrated Navigation System (IBS)


• Dynamic
D namic Positioning S
System
stem (DP)
• Integrated Automation System (IAS)
• Remote Control System (RC)
• Integrated Safety Management System (ISMS)
• Onboard Training System (OBTS)
• AC/Ventilation Control System (HVAC)
• Advanced Logging Tools (APIS)
• Administrative Systems & Tools

9
Valmarine
EXPERIENCE FROM VARIOUS SHIP APPLICATIONS

Ferries

Ro--Ro / Ro-
Ro Ro-Pax
Cruise

Fast ferries
10
EXPERIENCE FROM VARIOUS SHIP APPLICATIONS
Valmarine

Auxiliary
A ili Fl
Fleett

Offshore Supply/
Ice breaker

FPSO

11
Valmarine
EXPERIENCE FROM VARIOUS SHIP APPLICATIONS

Chemical carriers / LNG


Product tankers

Tankers

Redundant Propulsion
12
Valmarine VME System
S t Overview
O i
Operator Report/log/
Ethernet
Interfaces recording
di
On-shore link
Remote REMOTE DIAGNOSTICS X-OPS NT-OPS NT-OPS NT-PCS
NT-ALP
diagnostics NT-BU
NT DIA
NT-DIA Openness
REPORT
SERVER
MODEM MODEM Picture
CONTROLROOM
NETWORK (ETHERNET from the
10Mbit/s) Test Hal
SWITCH SWITCH
DIA BU ALP X-OPS RTS RTS GTW
Electronic
PC
Doc.
Stations
PLC
Integrated
REDUNDANT PCS PCS Bridge
PROCESS NETWORK
Redundancy (ETHERNET 10Mbit/s S t
System
DETERMINISTIC) System
CONTROLROOM communication Main Engine
NETWORK FIELD BUS
FIELD BUS HUB RC
NT-GTW DP
Integration
AS-I BUS
O BUS
PROFI US
Power Supply FFB BUS RACK I/O EMBEDDED I/OMOTOR INTELLIGENT ISMS
CONTROLLER EMBEDDED I/O
System
I/O Arrangement
I/O Card
13
Damatic DNA System with VME Process and
GTW Stations
Valmarine
OPS, BU, DIA OPS, ALP

h
P
RM
L/ D
FD X
10 0
Hirsc hma nn
P1 / P2
FA UL T
AU TO N EG
RI N G P OR T
LE D TE ST
h
P

1
2
3
Hirsc h ma nn

1
2
h
P

1
2
3
Hirsc h ma nn

1
3
2
4

RING h Hirsc h ma nn

FD X
10 0
P
RM
L/ D
P1 / P2
FA UL T
AU TO N EG
RI N G P OR T
LE D TE ST
h
P

1
2
3
Hirsc h ma nn

1
2
h
P

1
2
3
Hirsc hma n n

1
3
2
4

SWITCH SWITCH
3 4 3 4
4 4 4 4

SE LE C T SE LE C T

CONTROL ROOM PART


M S2 108 - 2 M M2 - 2FX M 3/ 2TX 1 M S2 108 - 2 M M2 - 2FX M 3/ 2TX 1
M M 2 - 4T X1 M M 2 - 4T X1

Mo du l Mo du l Mo du l Mo du l Mo du l Mo du l

NET
MAC 1 1 MAC 1 1
IP 2 2 IP 2 2

3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
Statio n Statio n

PROCESS PART
PCS PPCS
CS
G TW :LIS M A IN RES. R TS RRTS
TS M A IN RE S. GTW:LIS
G TW :LIS

14
Valmarine DNA S
System
t O
Overview
i

DNA and
Communication

ACN

15
Valmarine O
Operator
t Interface
I t f

X-OPS

multiple
NT--OPS
NT windows

Up to three
monitors
it

ffunctional
ti l and
d
standard keyboards
16
REDUNDANT PCS
MAIN RESERVE
PROCESS NETWORK
Valmarine
FBC FBC
I/O S
Solutions
l ti
UP TO 2 FBC PICR = PROCESS INTERFACE
PER PCS RACK I/O CONTROLLER REMOTE
(MAIN AND
RES. EACH) FBC = FIELD BUS CONTROLLER
IN A 6 SLOTS FPUS = FIELD POWER UNIT STANDBY
BASIC I/O
I/OCABINET
I/O CABINET
CABINET
MODULE

FPUS 24VDC
EMBEDDED I/O
FIELD BUS I/O FIELD BUS (TWISTED PAIR) 375kbit/s
375kbit/ 4 I/O CARD SLOTS
PICR UP TO 32 SIGNALS
(COAX OR
FIBER OPTIC) 24VDC
1Mbit/s 24VDC UP TO 8 UNITS
PER PICR

UP TO 16 UNITS
220VAC
PER PICR
MOTOR CONTROLLER
3 I/O CARD SLOTS
FOR UP TO 3 MOTORS
MAX. 16 PICR
PER FBC

17
REDUNDANT PCS
MAIN RESERVE
PROCESS NETWORK
Valmarine
MOI MOI
I/O S
Solutions
l ti
PICR = PROCESS INTERFACE
RACK I/O CONTROLLER REMOTE
FBOI FBOI MOI = MULTI OPTICAL INTERFACE
UP TO 12
FIBER OPTIC FBOI = FIBEROPTIC INTERFACE
BRANCHES
I/O CABINET

FBOI PICR

FBOI PICR

FBOI PICR

FBOI PICR

FBOI PICR
UP TO 4 FBOI
SEGMENTS
PER BRANCH

FBOI PICR

18
REDUNDANT PCS
MAIN RESERVE
PROCESS NETWORK
Valmarine
MOI
I/O S
Solutions
l ti
PICR = PROCESS INTERFACE
RACK I/O CONTROLLER REMOTE
FBOI MOI = MULTI OPTICAL INTERFACE
UP TO 12 UP TO 12
FIBER OPTIC FBOI = FIBEROPTIC INTERFACE
GALVANIC ISOLATED
BRANCHES COAXIAL BRANCHES

PICR

FBOI PICR

PICR

FBOI PICR

PICR

FBOI PICR

19
Valmarine Rack I/O

Ê High signal packing density and extensive


selection of standard and special I/O unit
Ê Provides local operation switches,
measuringg points
p and indicators
Ê From1 to 8 channels per I/O card
Ê Up
U tto 15 I/O cards
d in
i a rack
k

•Built in UPS
•Earth fault monitoring
•Battery condition
monitoring

20
Valmarine Rack I/O
/O

21
Valmarine Rack I/O

Ê Terminal boards for


connection of field
wiring
Ê Screw or spring type
of terminals

22
Valmarine Motor Controller
Ê For embedding
g into motor starter cabinets
Ê Using starter AC control voltage for power supply
and I/O signals
Ê I/O connections can be tested prior to delivery of
the motor starter units
Ê Reduced cabling and connection costs

23
Valmarine Embedded I/O
Embedded I/O
• Small size, suitable for embedding into
electronic cabinets of equipment supplier
• I/O connection can be tested prior to
installation onboard
• Reduces cabling and connection costs
Intelligent Embedded I/O
• Includes Programmable Logic
Controller
• Embeds the control tasks to
the local level
• Control functions can be
tested with controlled
equipment prior to
installation onboard
24
Valmarine
Versatile I/O cards

Ê An extensive selection of I/O cards are


available
Ê LED indications
indications, test-
test-switches and measuring
points are available on I/O cards
I/O CARD & TERMINAL BOARD

•Robust hardware (electronic


short circuit protection of I/O
cards)
•Plug and Play change of I/O
cards
•Alarm timestamp from 1 to 10
ms on binary y I/O cards
(depending on card type)
25
Valmarine R d d
Redundancy
A redundant process station with hot
back--up control facilities and with hot
back
PROCESS
NETWORK
repair possibilities is achieved through:
PROCESS PROCESS
CONTROL CONTROL
STATION STATION
MAIN RESERVE
CF N
PB C
CF N
PB C
UPDATE BUS
•All processors, field bus controllers,
UC U UC U

process interface controllers and the


MAIN
FIELD BUS
RESERVE
FIELD BUS
power supply
p pp y units for each pprocess
MAIN RESERVE
station and I/O racks are doubled.
PROCESS PROCESS
INTERFACE P I INTERFACE
CONTROLLER I P CONTROLLER
I P P I
MAIN CU UC RESERVE
I/O POWER
UNIT
I/O POWER
UNIT (optional) •The main PCS is connected to the
P I
I P
I P
P I
main system bus and the reserve PCS
CU UC
I/O CARDS to the reserve bus. Main PCS connects
to main field bus and reserve to reserve
field bus.
26
Valmarine I t
Integration
ti
Easy integration of other computer
systems provides one single source of
operation and monitoring
Ê A wide range of data communication protocols
are available for PLC’s or Computer systems
Ê Protocols outside standard range can be
programmed in CC--language
Ê Connection via Gateways provides link
separation from process controllers
Ê RS232/422/485 and Ethernet electric interface
standards
Ê Redundant serial lines connections available

27
Valmarine Power Supply System for System Cabinet

Base module for


Station cards

Power unit for Base


module:
220VAC inlet,
24VDC outlet
tl t to
t
cards in base
module and
Batteries (SPU)

Battery backup unit


(SPUC)

28
Power Supply
pp y System
y for I/O Cabinet
Valmarine

IPU:
Power unit for I/O
cards in the rack,
rack
makes 12VDC and FPUS;
5VDC 220VAC inlet,
24VDC outlet.
Includes battery
p unit
backup

29
Valmarine D
Documentation
t ti and
d SW

Ê Full scale “Factory Acceptance


Testing”
Ê Short start
start--up time of the system at
commissioning
Ê Ch
Changes tto all
ll applications
li ti can be
b
done on-
on-site by our commissioning
team
team
Ê If required,
q the System
y can easily
y be
expanded during the commissioning
phase (e.g. additional I/O units)

30
Valmarine El t
Electronic
i DDocumentation
t ti
El t
Electronic
i DDocumentation
t ti
includes:

• Operators Guide
• Technical Manual
• System Application Document
(SAD)
• Info
InfoT
Text
• Manuals From Other Suppliers
31
Valmarine Direct access to documentation.

32
Updated
p Documents makes Problem Solving
g more Efficient
Valmarine

Starting purifiers manually

Edit

33
Valmarine Dynamic Updated Documents

34
Direct Access to the Right point in other suppliers
Operation
p and Maintenance Manual
Valmarine

Edit

Comments made for updating existing document.


35
Valmarine Project phases

Ê Production of cabinets
Ê Instrumentation list, graphic displays,
functions (customer-
(customer-Valmarine)
Ê Shipment of cabinets (without electronic units
in swing frame which are kept at Valmarine
for testing)
Ê Programming, testing
Ê Installation of cabinets onboard, connection
and pre-
pre-check of sensor signals
Ê Factory Acceptance Test (FAT)
Ê Shipment of Electronics

36
Independent Networks in Order to Increase
Valmarine Operational Safety

44
37
Valmarine D
Dynamic
i PPositioning
iti i System
S t
• Flexible work place where function is
selected according to operational
needs
• Extreme reduction in traditional
console equipment
• Operator console integrated in chair
with multi functional work station (NAV-
(NAV-IAS
IAS--
DP)
g
• Protection against p
physical
y damage g
with full redundancy for critical functions
• Triple
p redundancy y in DP ((Majority
j y Voting) g)
Flexible fitting of work stations
• Reduced cabling cost
• Easy to retrofit
38
Valmarine Picture
Pi t off our test
t t hall
h ll

39
Valmarine Picture
Pi t off our test
t t hall
h ll

40
Valmarine Reporting/logging/recording

Ê APIS Extended Report System


– The APIS ERS is a powerful tool for preventive
maintenance and trouble shooting g based on real
time and historical data collected from the
Damatic automation system
y
Ê NT-Report system
NT-
– The
Th NT-
NT-Report
R t system
t iis designed
d i d to
t fulfil
f lfil the
th
basic needs for periodic reporting with on-
on-line
connection to Damatic automation system for
collection of data

41
Valmarine Ad
Advanced
d logging
l i tools
t l
APIS
Historic data in databases are accessed through trend
pages fixed and user defined reports
pages, reports. Data is
available on-
on-line in database for one year, and stored
on tape for the complete ship’s
ship s history
history.

42
Valmarine Reporting/logging/recording

Ê Event Recorder
– The Event Recorder provides long-
long-term storage
of events and includes versatile search and
analysing tools. It is on-
on-line connected to the
Damatic automation system
y
Ê Manoeuvre Recorder
– The
Th Manoeuvre
M recorder
d fulfils
f lfil the
th basic
b i needsd
for recording of manoeuvre data, with on-
on-line
connection to the Damatic automation system
for collection of manoeuvre statuses, set points
and feedback values
43
Valmarine M i Engine
Main E i Remote
R t Control
C t l System
S t

PROCESS PROCESS

Ê The Damatic Main CONTROL


STATION
MAIN
CFN CFN
CONTROL
STATION
RESERVE

PBC PBC
Engine Remote UCU UCU

Control System is
constructed according
the single failure P
BACKUP
P
I I

concept where one C


COMMAND
SYSTEM C
PITCH COMMAND
PITCH POSITION

single system failure MAIN


SYSTEM

P P
I MAIN I

will
ill nott reduce
d the
th C
COMMAND
SYSTEM C
PITCH COMMAND
PITCH POSITION

operation availability. RPM


SETPOINT

FIXED
RPM
COMMAND

ODB
CPP

44
Valmarine M i Engine
Main E i Remote
R t Control
C t l System
S t

Ê The Damatic RC system covers the following


machinery configurations:
– Reversible engines with fixed pitch propeller
– Reversible twin engines with two shaft lines and
fixed pitch propellers
– Single engines with pitch propeller
– Multi-
Multi-engine system of either slow
slow--speed
reversible type with fixed pitch propellers or
medium speed with controllable pitch propeller
– Integration
teg at o oof PTO
O generators
ge e ato s

45
Valmarine M i Engine
Main E i Remote
R t Control
C t l System
S t

Ê Customised control panels


for Bridge, Bridge Wings
ECR and dL
Locall stand
t d
Ê High quality levers with
f ll -up function
follow-
follow f ti
Ê Levers combine
speed/pitch
d/ it h setting
tti and
d
emergency telegraph
Ê L
Levers have
h dual
d l
potentiometers for
maximum redundancy y
Ê Control, monitoring and
alarm displays
p y in Damatic
system
46
Valmarine M i Engine
Main E i Remote
R t Control
C t l System
S t

47
Valmarine

Integrated Safety Management


System
Valmarine ISMS

Ê The Integrated Safety Management System ISMS


gives the crew the ability to manage all potential
emergency situations within one integrated
system :
system.
– Fire
– Smoke
– Flooding
– Terrorist attacks
Ê The ISMS includes an On-
On-board Training System
(OBTS) By realistic training in port or at sea the
(OBTS).
crew are better prepared to handle emergencies.

49
Valmarine ISMS

Ê The ISMS ensures that the operators can react


quickly and intuitive to emergencies by:
– Showing graphic views of deck arrangement
with layers and zoom functions
functions.
– Showing alarms, information and plotted
objects in graphic views.
views
– Provides remote controls as required.
– Gives
Gi scenario
i handling
h dli advises:
d i
• What to do.
• How to perform the actions.
• O
Order
de and
a d timing
t g of
o actions.
act o s

50
Valmarine ISMS

Ê ISMS control stations can be located according


ship owners requirements for emergency handling,
e.g in control rooms or local safety stations.
Ê At Bridge or in Safety centre the ISMS replaces the
traditional p
plotting
g boards and information can be
presented on large screens.
Ê The ISMS is operated as a separate console or
integrated with the Damatic machinery automation
system providing quick access to control and
system,
monitoring functions for the machinery systems.

51
Valmarine ISMS

Ê Main systems that communicates with the


ISMS are:
z Fire detection and alarm z Fire fighting system (CO2 ,
system H l
Halon, Hi
Highh Fog
F etc.)
t )
z Fire doors z HVAC system
z Machinery automation system z Emergency Shutdown system
z Stability management system z Voyage data recorder
z Water tight door system z CCTV System

52
Integrated
Valmarine S f t Management
Safety M t System
S t
The ISMS
S S gives the crew the ability to manage all potential
emergency situations within one integrated system
ISMS interfaces are:
• Fire detection and
alarm system
• Fire
Fi doors
d
• Machinery
automation system
• Stability management
system
• Water-tight door
system
• Fire-fighting systems,
such as CO2 or Halon
release systems
• HVAC system
• Emergency shutdown
system
• Voyage data recorder
53
Valmarine ISMS

Event
lists
Plotting
symbols

Layers

General
arr. plan

User interface

54
Valmarine ISMS

Integration
55
Valmarine I t
Integrated
t d Bridge
B id System
S t (IBS)

Functionalities:

• Propulsion
P l i C Control
t l
• Steering Control
• Course keeping autopilot &
speed autopilot
• Electronic Charts (ECDIS)
• ARPA target display on ECDIS
• Voyage
V Management
M t System
S t
• Navigation Radar
• Communications
56
Valmarine IBS b
basic
i arrangementt

57
VALMARINE

List of Abbreviations &


Terms
REMOTE DIAGNOSTICS X-OPS NT-OPS NT-OPS NT-PCS
NT-ALP
NT-BU
NT-DIA

REPORT
SERVER
MODEM MODEM
CONTROLROOM
NETWORK (ETHERNET
10Mbit/s)
SWITCH SWITCH
DIA BU ALP X-OPS RTS RTS GTW

PC

PLC

REDUNDANT PCS PCS


PROCESS NETWORK
(ETHERNET 10Mbit/s
DETERMINISTIC)
CONTROLROOM
NETWORK FIELD BUS HUB

NT-GTW

AS I BUS
AS-I
PROFI BUS
FFB BUS RACK I/O EMBEDDED I/OMOTOR INTELLIGENT
CONTROLLER EMBEDDED I/O
VALMARINE
Station/Server
St ti /S

Ê PCS – Process Control Station/Server


Ê OPS – Operator Station/Server
Ê ALP – Alarm Processor
Ê DIA – Diagnostic Station/Server
Ê GTW:LIS – Logic Interface Station/Server
Ê GTW:CIS – Computer Interface Station/Server
Ê RTS – Router
R t St Station
ti

2
VALMARINE
DNA St
Station/Server
ti /S

EAS - Engineering Activity Server


EAC - Engineering Activity Client
FA - Field Activity
Acti it (IO;
(IO Field-
Field-bus)
b s)
DNA - Dynamic Network of Applications
XA - Connectivity Activity
CA - Controls
C t l A Activity
ti it
EA - Engineering Activity
OA - Operator Activity
IA - Information
I f ti Activity
A ti it
3
VALMARINE
ACN Process
P Station
St ti & GTW

ACN Application Controller Node


EFC Ethernet to Field bus Converter
PMM Personality Module for metsoACN
PMC Personality Module Connector ( connector
module for PMM Unit)
EIO E b dd d I/O
Embedded

4
VALMARINE
VME Station
St ti Cards/Equipment
C d /E i t

Cards Equipment
Ê CPU – Central Processing Unit Ê SBC – Serial Bus Controller
Ê GDU – Graphic Display Unit Ê NCA – Network Connection Adapter
Ê G C – Graphical
GDC G Display Controller
C Ê ECFR – Ethernet Repeater

Ê DMU – Dynamic Memory Unit Ê ESU – Ehetrnet SCSI Unit


Ê ECU – Ethernet Connection Unit
Ê FBC2 – Field Bus Controller
Ê TAP – Tapping Unit for system bus
Ê NCU – Network Connection Unit
Ê DCU – Damatic Connection Unit
Ê RSU6 – RS Serial Communication
Unit
Ê RPT – Repeater card

5
VALMARINE
P
Power Supplies
S li & relations
l ti

Ê VPU – VME Power Unit ( supplying 6 cards )


Ê VPU2 - VME Power Unit ( supplying 3 cards )
Ê FPUS – Field Power Unit Single Phase
Ê IPU – IO Power Unit
Ê SPU – Standby Power Unit
Ê SPUC – Standby Power Unit and Control
Ê BTMU – Battery
B tt T
Testt & M
Monitoring
it i U Unit
it

6
VALMARINE
IO Cards
C d

Conv. IO
Ê AIU – Analogue Input Unit Ê PIC – Process Interface Controller
Ê AOU – Analogue Output Unit
Ê ACU – Analogue
g Controller Unit
Ê TIU – Temperatur Input Unit (
E b dd d IO
Embedded
PT100)
Ê AIR/AOR/BIR/BOR/AIF/AOF/TIR/FIR
Ê TCU – Thermocouple
Th l Input
I t Unit
U it
Ê CFR - Interface Module
Ê BIU – Binary Input Unit
Ê PICR – Process Interface Controller
Ê BOU – Binary Output Unit Remote (embedded IO)
Ê PLU – Programmable Logic Unit
Ê FIU – Frequency
q y Input
p Unit Motor Controllers
Ê EIU –EXI Input Unit Ê MC – Motor Controller

Ê AIE – EXI Analogue Input Unit Ê MC/CI – Motor Controller/Current Input

Ê EOU – EXI Analogue Output Unit Ê MC/2O2I


C/ O – Motor Contr./2
C / output & 2Input

Ê BIE – EXI Binary Input Unit Ê MC/O3I – Motor Contr./1 outut & 3 Input
7
The difference between
VALMARINE
VME St
Station
ti and
d NT Server
S

RGB

8
The difference between
VALMARINE
VME St
Station
ti and
d NT Server
S
X-OPS,, built on VME Station Cards NT OPS, built on ”standard”
NT-OPS, standard PC
and pheripical equipment like tecknology.
process keyboard and monitors.

9
VALMARINE
Th term
The t ”Controlroom”
”C t l ”

A ”control room” in the Damatic XDi world can be defined as an


area where commonly operations are perfomed
perfomed.
Normally the Machinery Space will be control room A1. HVAC
can then be B1.
B1
The name A1/A2/B1 and B2 etc. will be used in station names
etc (next slide)
etc. slide). Graphical pictures in one control room can not
be controlled from another control room.
In each control room there are at least one alarm station
station.
Process stations can be common for several control rooms, but
they are normally splitted as well.

10
VALMARINE
I t
Internal
l Station
St ti Names
N
E
Examples
l
Ê A1O1, A1O2 – Operator Station 1 and 2 in controlroom A1
Ê A2O1, A2O2 – Operator Station 1 and 2 in controlroom A2
Ê B1O1 B1O2 – Operator Station 1 and 2 in controlroom B1
B1O1,
Ê AP01, AP02, AP03 – Process station 1, 2 and 3
Ê A1A1, A1A2 – Main and Res. Alarm Station in ctrl.room A1
Ê A2A1, A2A2 – Main and Res. Alarm Station in ctrl.room A2
Ê B1A1, B1A2 – Main and Res. Alarm Station in ctrl.room B1
Ê AL01 AL02
AL01, AL02, AL03 – LIS station 1
1,2
2 and 3
3.
Ê AD01, AD02 – Diagnostic Station 1 and 2
Ê AC01, AC02 – CIS Station 1 and 2
11
VALMARINE
Oth Abbrivations
Other Abb i ti
AC – Air Condition CW - Cooling Water
Ê

Ê AFT - Aft of ship DEV - Deviation


Ê

Ê ALT - Alternator
Alt t DG - Diesel Generator
Ê

Ê AUTO - Automatic DISCH - Discharge


Ê

Ê AUX - Auxiliary DISTW - Distilled Water


Ê

Ê AZIP - Azipod DO - Diesel Oil


Ê

Ê BRG - Bearing ECR - Engine Control Room


Ê

Ê BLK WAT - Black


ac Water
ate EL - Electrical
Ê

Ê BM - Basic Module CB - Circuit Breaker


Ê

Ê BT – Bow Thruster EMERG - Emergency


Ê E
Ê BW - Ballast Water ENG - Engine
Ê

Ê BWT - Ballast Water Tank EVAP - Evaporator


Ê

EXCIT - Excitation
Ê 12
VALMARINE
Oth Abbrivations
Other Abb i ti
Ê EXH GAS - Exhaust Gas LT - Low Temperature
Ê

Ê EXP - Expansion LUB - Lubrication


Ê

Ê FO Fuel
F l Oil MDO - Marine
Ê M i Diesel
Di l Oil
Ê FW - Fresh Water MSB - Main Switch Board
Ê

Ê FWD - Forward MSS - Mode Selection System


Ê

Ê GO - Gas Oil OUTL – Outlet


Ê

Ê GRAD - Gradient PMS - Power Management System


Ê

Ê GW - G
G Grey
ey Water
ate LO - Lubrication Oil
Ê

Ê HFO - Heavy Fuel Oil PRESS - Pressure


Ê

Ê HW – HardWare PS - Port Side


Ê

Ê HT - High Temperature REQ – Request


Ê

Ê INC
C - Incinerator RMB - Redundant
Ê R d d t Basic
B i Module
d l
Ê INL - Inlet 13
VALMARINE
Oth Abbrivations
Other Abb i ti
Ê SW - Sea Water
Ê SOW – Sof
Softt Ware
Ê TK - Tank
Ê TW - Technical Water
Ê VLV - Valve

14
VALMARINE
Valmarine

Damatic DNA
System
y bus

1
VALMARINE DNA General

Damatic
D i DNA (Dynamic
(D i Network
N k off Applications)
A li i ) is i a distributed
di ib d controll system, with
i h distributed
di ib d hardware
h d
and distributed software. The system’s modular architecture and flexible structure enable the computer
capacity to be fully distributed among a number of stations connected to an Ethernet based System
Communication Network.
Network The result is a decentralised database where data are processed and stored in the
actual station where the data has its origin.
The powerful microprocessors used assure high-speed processing and high capacity within each station. The
stations performing the different system functions,
functions like Operator Station,
Station Process Control Station and
Gateway Stations, are connected to the System Network through Managed Switches. The combination of
Managed Switches and an Ethernet with 100Mpbs bandwidth ensures real time update of data under all load
conditions The System Communication Network is arranged in a ring structure
conditions.

TCP/IP & TOKEN

OSI Model Layers

2
VALMARINE
N t
Network
k components
t

Switch: Connects the VME side and DNA side (control room bus)
PC Ethernet card: DNA side of Control room bus. Normally a 3com
server card.

3
Damatic DNA with NCA Process &
VALMARINE
GTW St
Stations
ti
O P S , B U , D IA O P S ,A L P

h Hirs c h ma n n h Hi rs c hm a n n h Hirs c hm a n n h Hi rs c h ma n n h Hi rs c hm a n n h Hi rs c hm a n n
P P 1 /P 2 P P P P 1 /P 2 P P
RM FAUL T RM FAUL T

S W IT C H S W IT C H
L/ D A UT ONE G 1 1 1 1 L/D AUT ONE G 1 1 1 1
F DX RNI G P ORT 2 2 2 2 F DX RIN G P ORT 2 2 2 2
10 0 LE D TE S T 3 3 10 0 LE D TE S T 3 3
3 4 4 3 4 3 4 4 3 4
4 4
S E LE CT S E LE CT
MS 21 08 - 2 MM2 - 2FX M3 2
/ TX 1 MM2 - 2FX M3 2
/ TX 1 MS 21 08 - 2 MM2 - 2FX M3 2
/ TX 1 MM2 - 2FX M3 /2 TX 1

Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul

MA C 1 1 MA C 1 1

IP 2 2 IP 2 2

3 3 3 3

4 4 4 4
S t at i on S tati on

S YS TE M N ETW O RK
100M bps E TH ER N ET
F IB R E O P T IC R IN G
S W IT C H S W IT C H S W IT C H S W IT C H
h Hirs c h ma n n h Hi rs c hm a n n h Hi rs c hm a n n h Hi rs c h ma n n h Hi rs c hm a n n h Hi rs c hm a n n h Hi rs c h ma n n h Hi rs c hm a n n h Hi rs c hm a n n h Hi rs c h ma n n h Hi rs c hm a n n h Hirs c hm a n n
P P 1 /P 2 P P P P1 /P2 P P P P1 /P2 P P P P 1 /P 2 P P
RM FAUL T RM FAUL T RM FAUL T RM FAUL T
L/D AUT ONE G 1 1 1 1 L/ D AUT ONE G 1 1 1 1 L/D AUT ONE G 1 1 1 1 L/D AUT ONE G 1 1 1 1
F DX RIN G P ORT 2 2 2 2 F DX RIN G P ORT 2 2 2 2 F DX RIN G P ORT 2 2 2 2 F DX RIN G P ORT 2 2 2 2
10 0 LE D TE S T 3 3 10 0 LE D TE S T 3 3 10 0 LE D TE S T 3 3 10 0 LE D TE S T 3 3
3 4 4 3 4 3 4 4 3 4 3 4 4 3 4 3 4 4 3 4
4 4 4 4
S E LE CT S E LE CT S E LE CT S E LE CT
MS 21 08 - 2 MM2 - 2FX M3 2
/ TX 1 MM2 - 2FX M3 2
/ TX 1 MS 21 08 - 2 MM2 - 2FX M3 2
/ TX 1 MM2 - 2FX M3 /2 TX 1 MS 21 08 - 2 MM2 - 2FX M3 2
/ TX 1 MM2 - 2FX M3 2
/ TX 1 MS 21 08 - 2 MM2 - 2FX M3 /2 TX 1 MM2 - 2FX M3 /2 TX 1

Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul

MA C 1 1 MA C 1 1 MA C 1 1 MA C 1 1

IP 2 2 IP 2 2 IP 2 2 IP 2 2

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
S tati on S t ati on S t at i on S t ati on

ACN M ACN R GTW

F B1 F B2 F B1 F B2 F B1 F B2
P B1 P B2 P B1 P B2 P B1 P B2
SBY S BY S BY
RUN RUN RUN
HDD HDD HDD
T em p a larm T em p a larm T em p a l arm
5 VDC o n 5 VDC o n 5 VDC o n
P o wer OK P o wer OK P o wer O K

m etso m etso m etso

E FC E FC
S E R IA L L IN E S

4
Damatic DNA with NCA Process &
VALMARINE
GTW St
Stations
ti
O P S , B U , D IA O P S ,A L P

h Hirs c h ma n n h Hi rs c hm a n n h Hirs c hm a n n h Hi rs c h ma n n h Hi rs c hm a n n h Hi rs c hm a n n
P P 1 /P 2 P P P P 1 /P 2 P P
RM FAUL T RM FAUL T

S W IT C H S W IT C H
L/ D A UT ONE G 1 1 1 1 L/D AUT ONE G 1 1 1 1
F DX RNI G P ORT 2 2 2 2 F DX RIN G P ORT 2 2 2 2
10 0 LE D TE S T 3 3 10 0 LE D TE S T 3 3
3 4 4 3 4 3 4 4 3 4
4 4
S E LE CT S E LE CT
MS 21 08 - 2 MM2 - 2FX M3 2
/ TX 1 MM2 - 2FX M3 2
/ TX 1 MS 21 08 - 2 MM2 - 2FX M3 2
/ TX 1 MM2 - 2FX M3 /2 TX 1

Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul

MA C 1 1 MA C 1 1

IP 2 2 IP 2 2

3 3 3 3

4 4 4 4
S t at i on S tati on

S YS TE M N ETW O RK
100M bps E TH ER N ET
F IB R E O P T IC R IN G
A transmission Smedium
W IT C H carriesS W IT C H
h Hirs c h ma n n h Hi rs c hm a n n h Hi rs c hm a n n h Hi rs c h ma n n h Hi rs c hm a n n h Hi rs c hm a n n
S W IT C H
h Hi rs c h ma n n h Hi rs c hm a n n h Hi rs c hm a n n
S W IT C H
h Hi rs c h ma n n h Hi rs c hm a n n h Hirs c hm a n n
P P 1 /P 2 P P P P1 /P2 P P P P1 /P2 P P P P 1 /P 2 P P

information event at a rate of 10


RM FAUL T RM FAUL T RM FAUL T RM FAUL T
L/D AUT ONE G 1 1 1 1 L/ D AUT ONE G 1 1 1 1 L/D AUT ONE G 1 1 1 1 L/D AUT ONE G 1 1 1 1
F DX RIN G P ORT 2 2 2 2 F DX RIN G P ORT 2 2 2 2 F DX RIN G P ORT 2 2 2 2 F DX RIN G P ORT 2 2 2 2
10 0 LE D TE S T 3 3 10 0 LE D TE S T 3 3 10 0 LE D TE S T 3 3 10 0 LE D TE S T 3 3
3 4 4 3 4 3 4 4 3 4 3 4 4 3 4 3 4 4 3 4
4 4 4 4
S E LE CT S E LE CT S E LE CT S E LE CT
MS 21 08 - 2 MM2 - 2FX M3 2
/ TX 1 MM2 - 2FX M3 2
/ TX 1 MS 21 08 - 2 MM2 - 2FX M3 2
/ TX 1 MM2 - 2FX M3 /2 TX 1 MS 21 08 - 2 MM2 - 2FX M3 2
/ TX 1 MM2 - 2FX M3 2
/ TX 1 MS 21 08 - 2 MM2 - 2FX M3 /2 TX 1 MM2 - 2FX M3 /2 TX 1

Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul

MA C 1 1 MA C 1 1 MA C 1 1 MA C 1 1

IP 2 2 IP 2 2 IP 2 2 IP 2 2

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
S tati on S t ati on S t at i on S t ati on

or 100 Mb/s, using twisted pair DNA side = Control-room bus


over a distance
A C N M up to 100meters. ACN R GTW

P B1 P B2
F B1 F B2
P B1 P B2
F B1 F B2
All DNA activities
ti iti (lik
(like DNA P B1 P B2
F B1 F B2

SBY S BY S BY

OPS) are connected to the


RUN RUN RUN

The twisted pair network is


HDD HDD HDD
T em p a larm T em p a larm T em p a l arm
5 VDC o n 5 VDC o n 5 VDC o n
P o wer OK P o wer OK P o wer O K

m etso m etso m etso

logically a bus,
E F C but physically a E FC switches with two buses (main
S E R IA L L IN E S
star
t network.
t k Th The ttwisted
i t d pair
i and
d reserve).
)
cables use RJ-45 connectors.

5
Damatic DNA with NCA Process &
VALMARINE
GTW St
Stations
ti
O P S , B U , D IA O P S ,A L P

h Hirs c h ma n n h Hi rs c hm a n n h Hirs c hm a n n h Hi rs c h ma n n h Hi rs c hm a n n h Hi rs c hm a n n
P P 1 /P 2 P P P P 1 /P 2 P P
RM FAUL T RM FAUL T

S W IT C H S W IT C H
L/ D A UT ONE G 1 1 1 1 L/D AUT ONE G 1 1 1 1
F DX RNI G P ORT 2 2 2 2 F DX RIN G P ORT 2 2 2 2
10 0 LE D TE S T 3 3 10 0 LE D TE S T 3 3
3 4 4 3 4 3 4 4 3 4
4 4
S E LE CT S E LE CT
MS 21 08 - 2 MM2 - 2FX M3 2
/ TX 1 MM2 - 2FX M3 2
/ TX 1 MS 21 08 - 2 MM2 - 2FX M3 2
/ TX 1 MM2 - 2FX M3 /2 TX 1

Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul

MA C 1 1 MA C 1 1

IP 2 2 IP 2 2

3 3 3 3

4 4 4 4
S t at i on S tati on

S YS TE M N ETW O RK

Process bus
100M bps E TH ER N ET
F IB R E O P T IC R IN G
S W IT C H S W IT C H S W IT C H S W IT C H
The process bus is connectsing the Process Stations
h Hirs c h ma n n h Hi rs c hm a n n h Hi rs c hm a n n h Hi rs c h ma n n h Hi rs c hm a n n h Hi rs c hm a n n h Hi rs c h ma n n h Hi rs c hm a n n h Hi rs c hm a n n h Hi rs c h ma n n h Hi rs c hm a n n h Hirs c hm a n n
P P 1 /P 2 P P P P1 /P2 P P P P1 /P2 P P P P 1 /P 2 P P
RM FAUL T RM FAUL T RM FAUL T RM FAUL T
L/D AUT ONE G 1 1 1 1 L/ D AUT ONE G 1 1 1 1 L/D AUT ONE G 1 1 1 1 L/D AUT ONE G 1 1 1 1
F DX RIN G P ORT 2 2 2 2 F DX RIN G P ORT 2 2 2 2 F DX RIN G P ORT 2 2 2 2 F DX RIN G P ORT 2 2 2 2
10 0 LE D TE S T 3 3 10 0 LE D TE S T 3 3 10 0 LE D TE S T 3 3 10 0 LE D TE S T 3 3
3 4 4 3 4 3 4 4 3 4 3 4 4 3 4 3 4 4 3 4
4 4 4 4
S E LE CT S E LE CT S E LE CT S E LE CT
MS 21 08 - 2 MM2 - 2FX M3 2
/ TX 1 MM2 - 2FX M3 2
/ TX 1 MS 21 08 - 2 MM2 - 2FX M3 2
/ TX 1 MM2 - 2FX M3 /2 TX 1 MS 21 08 - 2 MM2 - 2FX M3 2
/ TX 1 MM2 - 2FX M3 2
/ TX 1 MS 21 08 - 2 MM2 - 2FX M3 /2 TX 1 MM2 - 2FX M3 /2 TX 1

Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul

MA C 1 1 MA C 1 1 MA C 1 1 MA C 1 1

IP 2 2 IP 2 2 IP 2 2 IP 2 2

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
S tati on S t ati on S t at i on S t ati on

(ACN) and the Switches.


ACN M ACN R GTW

F B1 F B2 F B1 F B2 F B1 F B2
P B1 P B2 P B1 P B2 P B1 P B2
SBY S BY S BY
RUN RUN RUN
HDD HDD HDD
T em p a larm T em p a larm T em p a l arm
5 VDC o n 5 VDC o n 5 VDC o n
P o wer OK P o wer OK P o wer O K

m etso m etso m etso

E FC E FC
S E R IA L L IN E S

6
Damatic DNA with NCA Process &
VALMARINE
GTW St
Stations
ti
O P S , B U , D IA O P S ,A L P

Fi ld bus
Field b
The process stations communicate with the I/O sub-
racks through the field bus, which is a coaxial cable up
to 4km long. Maximum length of the field bus depends
on the cable type. Transmission rate on the field bus is
1Mbits/s.S16 CH g
W IT I/O groups
p ((racks)) can be
S Wconnected.
h Hirs c h ma n n h Hi rs c hm a n n h Hirs c hm a n n h Hi rs c h ma n n h Hi rs c hm a n n h Hi rs c hm a n n
P P 1 /P 2 P P P P 1 /P 2 P P
RM FAUL T RM FAUL T

IT C H
L/ D A UT ONE G 1 1 1 1 L/D AUT ONE G 1 1 1 1
F DX RNI G P ORT 2 2 2 2 F DX RIN G P ORT 2 2 2 2
10 0 LE D TE S T 3 3 10 0 LE D TE S T 3 3
3 4 4 3 4 3 4 4 3 4
4 4
S E LE CT S E LE CT
MS 21 08 - 2 MM2 - 2FX M3 2
/ TX 1 MM2 - 2FX M3 2
/ TX 1 MS 21 08 - 2 MM2 - 2FX M3 2
/ TX 1 MM2 - 2FX M3 /2 TX 1

Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul

MA C 1 1 MA C 1 1

IP 2 2 IP 2 2

3 3 3 3

4 4 4 4
S t at i on S tati on

S YS TE M N ETW O RK
100M bps E TH ER N ET
The field bus is connected to I/O sub-rack through F IB R E O P T IC R IN G
S W IT C H S W IT C H S W IT C H S W IT C H
h Hirs c h ma n n
P
RM
L/D
F DX
10 0

Mo d ul

MA C

IP
P 1 /P 2
FAUL T
AUT ONE G
RIN G P ORT
LE D TE S T

S E LE CT
MS 21 08 - 2
h
P

1
2
3
4
Process Interface Controller (PIC) and to process
Hi rs c hm a n n

MM2 - 2FX M3 2

Mo d ul

2
1
2
3 4

/ TX 1
h

Mo d ul

1
2
P

1
2
3
4
Hi rs c hm a n n

MM2 - 2FX M3 2
/ TX 1
1
2
3 4
h
P
RM
L/ D
F DX
10 0
Hi rs c h ma n n

MS 21 08 - 2

Mo d ul

MA C

IP
P1 /P2
FAUL T
AUT ONE G
RIN G P ORT
LE D TE S T

S E LE CT
h
P

1
2
3
4
Hi rs c hm a n n

MM2 - 2FX M3 2

Mo d ul

2
1
2
3

/ TX 1
4
h

Mo d ul

1
2
P

1
2
3
4
Hi rs c hm a n n

1
2
3 4

MM2 - 2FX M3 /2 TX 1
h
P
RM
L/D
F DX
10 0
Hi rs c h ma n n

MS 21 08 - 2

Mo d ul

MA C

IP
P1 /P2
FAUL T
AUT ONE G
RIN G P ORT
LE D TE S T

S E LE CT

2
h
P

1
2
3
4
Hi rs c hm a n n

MM2 - 2FX M3 2

Mo d ul
1
2
3 4

/ TX 1
h
P

1
2
3
4
Hi rs c hm a n n

MM2 - 2FX M3 2

Mo d ul

1
2
1
2
3 4

/ TX 1
h
P
RM
L/D
F DX
10 0
Hi rs c h ma n n

MS 21 08 - 2

Mo d ul

MA C

IP
P 1 /P 2
FAUL T
AUT ONE G
RIN G P ORT
LE D TE S T

S E LE CT
h
P

1
2
3
4
Hi rs c hm a n n

1
2
3 4

MM2 - 2FX M3 /2 TX 1

Mo d ul

2
h
P

1
2
3
4
Hirs c hm a n n

1
2
3 4

MM2 - 2FX M3 /2 TX 1

Mo d ul

1
2

station through the FBC.


3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
S tati on S t ati on S t at i on S t ati on

ACN M ACN R GTW

F B1 F B2 F B1 F B2 F B1 F B2
P B1 P B2 P B1 P B2 P B1 P B2
SBY S BY S BY
RUN RUN RUN
HDD HDD HDD
T em p a larm T em p a larm T em p a l arm
5 VDC o n 5 VDC o n 5 VDC o n
P o wer OK P o wer OK P o wer O K

m etso m etso m etso

E FC E FC
S E R IA L L IN E S

7
Damatic DNA with NCA Process &
VALMARINE
GTW St
Stations
ti
O P S , B U , D IA O P S ,A L P

h Hirs c h ma n n h Hi rs c hm a n n h Hirs c hm a n n h Hi rs c h ma n n h Hi rs c hm a n n h Hi rs c hm a n n
P P 1 /P 2 P P P P 1 /P 2 P P
RM FAUL T RM FAUL T

S W IT C H S W IT C H
L/ D A UT ONE G 1 1 1 1 L/D AUT ONE G 1 1 1 1
F DX RNI G P ORT 2 2 2 2 F DX RIN G P ORT 2 2 2 2
10 0 LE D TE S T 3 3 10 0 LE D TE S T 3 3
3 4 4 3 4 3 4 4 3 4
4 4
S E LE CT S E LE CT
MS 21 08 - 2 MM2 - 2FX M3 2
/ TX 1 MM2 - 2FX M3 2
/ TX 1 MS 21 08 - 2 MM2 - 2FX M3 2
/ TX 1 MM2 - 2FX M3 /2 TX 1

Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul

MA C 1 1 MA C 1 1

IP 2 2 IP 2 2

3 3 3 3

4 4 4 4
S t at i on S tati on

S YS TE M N ETW O RK
100M bps E TH ER N ET
F IB R E O P T IC R IN G
S W IT C H S W IT C H S W IT C H S W IT C H
h Hirs c h ma n n h Hi rs c hm a n n h Hi rs c hm a n n h Hi rs c h ma n n h Hi rs c hm a n n h Hi rs c hm a n n h Hi rs c h ma n n h Hi rs c hm a n n h Hi rs c hm a n n h Hi rs c h ma n n h Hi rs c hm a n n h Hirs c hm a n n
P P 1 /P 2 P P P P1 /P2 P P P P1 /P2 P P P P 1 /P 2 P P
RM FAUL T RM FAUL T RM FAUL T RM FAUL T
L/D AUT ONE G 1 1 1 1 L/ D AUT ONE G 1 1 1 1 L/D AUT ONE G 1 1 1 1 L/D AUT ONE G 1 1 1 1
F DX RIN G P ORT 2 2 2 2 F DX RIN G P ORT 2 2 2 2 F DX RIN G P ORT 2 2 2 2 F DX RIN G P ORT 2 2 2 2
10 0 LE D TE S T 3 3 10 0 LE D TE S T 3 3 10 0 LE D TE S T 3 3 10 0 LE D TE S T 3 3
3 4 4 3 4 3 4 4 3 4 3 4 4 3 4 3 4 4 3 4
4 4 4 4
S E LE CT S E LE CT S E LE CT S E LE CT
MS 21 08 - 2 MM2 - 2FX M3 2
/ TX 1 MM2 - 2FX M3 2
/ TX 1 MS 21 08 - 2 MM2 - 2FX M3 2
/ TX 1 MM2 - 2FX M3 /2 TX 1 MS 21 08 - 2 MM2 - 2FX M3 2
/ TX 1 MM2 - 2FX M3 2
/ TX 1 MS 21 08 - 2 MM2 - 2FX M3 /2 TX 1 MM2 - 2FX M3 /2 TX 1

Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul Mo d ul

MA C 1 1 MA C 1 1 MA C 1 1 MA C 1 1

IP 2 2 IP 2 2 IP 2 2 IP 2 2

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
S tati on S t ati on S t at i on S t ati on

ACN M
Optical fiber Ethernet 10BASE-FL / ACN R GTW

m etso
T em p a larm
5 VDC o n
P o wer OK
HDD
RUN
SBY
P B1 P B2
F B1 F B2
100BASE-FX m etso
T em p a larm
5 VDC o n
P o wer OK
HDD
RUN
S BY
P B1 P B2
F B1 F B2

m etso
T em p a l arm
5 VDC o n
P o wer O K
HDD
RUN
S BY
P B1 P B2
F B1 F B2

E FC A transmission
E F C medium that carries information
S E R IA L L IN E S
even at a rate of 10 or 100 Mb/.The
Mb/ The fiber cable can
be used over a distances up to 2km. A optical fiber
cable is not affected by electromagnetic
disturbance
disturbance.
For long distances we use Optical Fiber instead of
Twisted Pair. 8
VALMARINE System Communication Network

The System Communication Network is the backbone for communication between the Process Control and
Gateway Stations (located in ACN units) and the Control Room Stations (Operator Station, Alarm Processor,
Backup Station and Diagnostic Station). The system communication network connects as well the APIS
report/log
t/l system
t andd LaserJet
L J t printers.
i t
The bus is a 100Mbs Ethernet fibre optic ring network based on Managed Switches for redundant, safe and
efficient data transfer. The connection between switches and peripherals is a redundant twisted pair cat.5
Ethernet cable.
cable In case of a failure in a switch or damage to the network cable the data transmission is
automatically rerouted within 500msec. For shorter distances, within the same compartment, a twisted pair
cat.5 Ethernet cable may be applied instead of fibre optics. A Damatic DNA system may constitute several
ring bus segments connected via switches.
switches As an option the network can be arranged with HUB
HUB’ss in a star
structure.

9
VALMARINE
S t
System C
Communication
i ti Network
N t k

10
VALMARINE
S it h
Switch

Switch

Unfortunately, there is no simple definition of a switch.


P d ddown tto a basic,
Pared b i concise i answer, a switch
it h
(depending on available features and current
configuration) can act as:
1.A repeater (OSI Layer 1 device.)
2.A bridge (OSI Layer 2 device.)
3.A router (OSI Layer 3 device)
4.A combination of items 1 - 3 .

11
VALMARINE
S it h
Switch

Switch
A switch connects two or more network segment together. It divides network into separate collision
domain.A switch can also connect 10 Mb/s and 100Mb/s segment together. It can also automatically learn
the
h networkk topology,
l knowing
k i which
hi h devices
d i ( MAC-addresses)
MAC dd ) are behind
b hi d a certain
i port off the
h switch,
i h
and in this way block unnecessary communication in the network.The switch can simultaneously convey
messages between multiple segments.

Using multiple switches redundantly linked together to form a


switch Mesh domain, switch Meshing dynamically distributes
traffic across load-balanced switch paths by seeking the fastest
path for new traffic between nodes.In actual operation, the
switch Mesh periodically determines the best ( lowest latency )
paths, then assigns these paths as a need arises.
If a link in the Mesh fails, the fast convergence time designed
into Meshing typically has an alternate route selected in less the
a second for traffic that was destined for the failed link. .

12
VALMARINE
Diff
Different
t ttypes
Type : HP2425 (J4813A)

Type : Hirschmann

13
VALMARINE

System Bus
System
Ê Stations connected to the System Bus
Ê Bus functionality
Ê Redundancy
Ê Components
Ê Layout drawings; internal connections
Ê Layout drawings; actual ship drawings
Alarm Station
VALMARINE
Stations
St ti Connected
C t d

NT-Operator
Station APIS or
Report

Main System Bus

Reserve System Bus


RS Interfaces

Remote
Diagnostics

Input/Out
Process Station
modules
2
VALMARINE
S t
System B
Bus F
Functionality
ti lit

3
Named based communication System bus:
VALMARINE
• Requesting station rearches data by
tagname, creates and maint. the link.
S t
System b
bus functionlality
f ti l lit
• Token passing , avoids communication conflicts
• HDLC protocol
• Link is maintained as long as data • 2/10/100mBaud Rate
is requested • Max.
M 50 stations
t ti on one b
bus segmentt
• 2600 m max. lenght

Router Station (RTS) Repeater Station (RPS)

• Communication with another system bus • Extension of system bus length

4
VALMARINE
S t
System b
bus Redundancy
R d d

5
Transparant System Bus redundancy:
VALMARINE
• automatic routing via either bus S t
System b
bus Redundancy
R d d
• both buses are active I.e. routing
algorithm in every station selects which
b tto be
bus b usedd tto conn. tto other
th stations
t ti

Network cards
• redundant network cards
• new systems use one NCU2. Older systems use two NCU cards.

6
VALMARINE
System
S t B
Bus C
Components:
t NCU

NCU Card (Network communication


U it)
Unit)
Located in each and every station. Takes care of the

communication
i ti between
b t stations.
t ti Thi
This is
i the
th old
ld

network card. There is one NCU card for Main bus

(slot 6) and one for the Reserve bus (slot 5).

Between the stations there are a thin wire Ethernet


cable, 75ς.

Transmission rate = 2MBit/s

The size is 3E.


3E

7
VALMARINE
System
S t B
Bus C
Components:
t NCU2

NCU2 Card (Network communication Unit)

Located in each and every station. Takes care of the


communication between stations. Now there is only
need for one NCU2 card for each station. On the
backside there is one adapter card which takes care
of the Main and Reserve Bus.

The NCU card is placed in slot 6 in a basic module.

The adapter card can be NCA (coax connection) or


NTA (TP connection).

Transmission rate = 10MBits/s

The size is 3E.

8
VALMARINE
NCA Ad
Adapter
t (C(Coax C
Conn.))

Both channels have three indicator lights.


Channel x:
• TXx = transmit to channel x
• RXx = receive at channel x

• CLx = collision at channel x

Jumpers TA0 - TA5 in the field X4 are used to set


the NCU2 card's token-address. TA0 stands for
the token address bit 0 and TA5 for the bit 5,
5 the
placed jumper stands for the bit value 1 and the
not placed stands for the value 0.
Jumpers X6 and X7 are not connected

9
VALMARINE
NTA Ad
Adapter
t (TP C
Conn.))

Both channels have three indicator lights.


Channel x:
• TXx = transmit to channel x
• RXx = receive at channel x
• CLx = collision at channel
• LONx = link connection ok
i channel
in h l1
The LON indicator light is lit when the channel
corresponding to live NTA2 is connected to an
active network device and NCU2 is installed
correctly. If the light does not light, check cables
and devices.

The jumpers TA0 - TA5 in the field X7 are used


for setting the token address of the NCU2 unit.
TA0 refers to bit 0 of the token address, and TA5
refers
f to
t bit 5.
5 The
Th sett jumper
j refers
f to
t bit value
l
1 and unset refers to value 0.
10
VALMARINE
S t
System b
bus components
t :TAP.
TAP
Between stations in one cabinet, the wiring is done by CAE Valmarine then with either thin wire
Ethernet cable (used together with NCU card), Coax 50ς (with NCA adapter and NCU2 card) or TP
(with NTA adapter and NCU2 card).

For old systems the System Bus was 75ς. And the bus is terminated with a 75ς resistor at both
ends. Then to communicate between the cabinets we needed the TAP unit. The TAP operates as a
matched tapping unit between system bus trunk cable and tap branch cables. 1or 2 trunk cables
can be connected to the TAP. When one is used, it means that this cabinet is at one of the end sides
of the bus. If the cabinet is somewhere in the middle of the bus, both trunk cables are in use.

Note that on the TAP there is two jumpers which are important:

11
VALMARINE
S t
System b
bus components
t :TAP
TAP
Between stations in one cabinet, the wiring is done by CAE Valmarine then with either thin wire
Ethernet cable (used together with NCU card), Coax 50ς (with NCA adapter and NCU2 card) or TP
(with NTA adapter and NCU2 card).

For old systems the System Bus was 75ς. And the bus is terminated with a 75ς resistor at both
ends. Then to communicate between the cabinets we needed the TAP unit. The TAP operates as a
matched tapping unit between system bus trunk cable and tap branch cables. 1or 2 trunk cables
can be connected to the TAP. When one is used, it means that this cabinet is at one of the end sides
of the bus. If the cabinet is somewhere in the middle of the bus, both trunk cables are in use.
X3: Connected if trunk cable
not connected.
Note that on the TAP there is two jumpers which are important:

X4 C
X4: Connected
t d if trunk
t k cable
bl
not connected.

12
System Bus Components:
VALMARINE
ECFR

Fibre Optical Repeater (ECFR):


ECFR is a two port Ethernet repeater with thin Ethernet (10Base2, BNC) and optical fibre (10Base
(10Base-FL,
FL,
ST) ports. Repeater is used for switching over thin Ethernet to optical fibre in the cabinet.
Fibre Optic is then used between the cabinets.
The recommended power supply input is charging voltage, which makes the changing of battery possible,
while the repeater is in use.

13
Summary
VALMARINE
F
Functionality
ti lit and
d techn.
t h Spec.
S
The different stations of the Damatic XD system communicate with each other through the system bus which
may be up to 2.6 km long in one segment. With a router station up to four system buses can be interconnected.
Communications are name-based and carried out in accordance with the 'token passing' procedure; transmission
rate is 2/10 Mbit/s.
The bus is a coaxial/fibre cable, and 50 different stations can be connected to it. The HDLC protocol is used in
data transmission on the bus, and messages are checked for correctness with cyclic redundancy code (CRC).
When required, erroneous data is retransmitted.
Each station connected to the system bus includes a Network Connection Unit (NCU) to which the connection is
made through the system bus connector (TAP). The TAP gives certain advantages, such as the following:
• flexible connection to system
• filtering of electrical voltage peaks
• electrical isolation.
The bus is easy to connect because it is brought to just one point in the cabinet. In addition, due to isolation the
failure of one station will not disrupt
p the operation
p of the entire bus.
If the bus length exceeds 2 km or if there is a lot of interference in the environment, it is necessary to install
repeaters (RPT) on the system bus in order to correct signal amplitude and timing errors.

Note that when using the NCU2 card there is no need for the TAP.
14
Internal connection of
VALMARINE
S t
System B
Bus. St
Standard
d d dwg.
d
NCU:

Cabinet without Red. PCS : T10076 .pdf

Cabinet with Red. PCS : T10077.pdf

Optical Field Bus, Cabinet1


without red. PCS : T10079 .pdf

NCU2:

Cabinet without Red. PCS : T10120.pdf

C bi
Cabinet with
i h Red.
R d PCS : T10123 df
T10123.pdf

Optical Field Bus, Cabinet1


without red. PCS : T10121.pdf

15
VALMARINE
Oth documents
Other d t

General about communication : GeneralAboutComm.pdf

Router Station : RTS.pdf

Repeater Station : RPS.pdf

16
General about Damatic XD
Communication Marine System

1 Communication Generally

1.1 Communication from the Point of View of Application


Communication is name-based, transparent and unaffected by changes in application. The connection
is specified by name. Communication takes care of creating the connection and transferring the data,
monitoring the data transfer and closing the connection.

You do not need to take Communication into account when designing an application.
The database is distributed to several stations. The data are stored in the same place where they are
generated by the application. The system has no centralized name/data bank.

You do not need to take the location of the target station into account, not even if it is situated behind
a RTS. The only exception is that the I/O module must be located in the same station as the connected
function module.

Communication is specified by the following data in the configuration:

• the name of the data to be connected


• updating direction (read/write)
• updating mode (continuous/event/conditional).

1.1.1.1 Continuous update


For continuous update you configure the updating rate 200 ms to 25.5 seconds based on the function
module interval.

Data is copied from the source module to the target module according to the specified transfer cycle
intervals. The copying starts with establishing the connection and ends with closing the connection.
Continuous update is the most commonly used transfer mode in applications. It is used both for
communication between process control stations and between an Operator and Process Control Station
when connecting to variable data and when the requester is interested in the instantaneous value of the
data. The connection between Process Stations will exist as long as the source and target modules are
present in the system. The connection between an Operator Station and a Process Control Station
exists while the target display module is shown on the monitor screen.

1.1.1.2 Event update


An event update can be triggered by the rising edge, falling edge, or both.
Data is copied from the source module to the target module when the data changes in the specified
way. The data must be a binary signal (bin or binev). The monitoring of changes starts when the
connection is established and ends when it is closed.

The event update is used for event communications between a Process Control Station and an Alarm
Station.

D:\Training\CD-Rom Documents\Course Documents\VME Stations Page 1 of 2


Hardware\System Bus\Other Doc\GeneralAboutComm.doc
Rev date:
General about Damatic XD
Communication Marine System

1.1.1.3 Conditional update


In Conditional updates data are copied from the source module to the target module only at times
specified by the function block.

Only writing is allowed in conditional communications. Therefore, the function block must exist in
the module that writes the update. The connection will only exist during the writing operation.
Conditional updates are used mainly for operating - like communications between Process Control
Stations (sequences, recipes and one-time operations) and also for communicating from an Operator
Station to Process Control Station / Alarm Station.

1.2 Creating, Maintaining and Closing the Connection


Following is a summary of the stages of communication between modules:

• finding the data to be connected and checking that the signals to be connected are compatible
(e.g. both are analog signals). The search is continued until the data is found.
• creating the connection
• transferring data and monitoring the connection
• the connection is closed by the creator station of the connection if the module where the
connection was specified or the target station disappears
• the connection is closed by the target station of the connection if data to be connected or the
creator station of the connection disappears

A change to a redundant station is not visible in communication, in other words, the connection
always follows the active station.

D:\Training\CD-Rom Documents\Course Documents\VME Stations Page 2 of 2


Hardware\System Bus\Other Doc\GeneralAboutComm.doc
Rev date:
Router Station Damatic XD
Marine System

1 Router Station (RTS)

1.1 General
A Router links two to four system buses together as transparently as possible, so that the same
principles apply to communication between stations using the same bus or different buses.

A Router is one of the stations connected to a system bus. It is given a share in the bus capacity of
each subsystem just as any station connected to the system bus of the subsystem.

1.2 Features

1.2.1 Network types


A single Router Station is able to link up to four system buses together and a maximum of five Router
Stations can be connected together using a mill-wide system bus (see Figure 1).

Figure 1 Recommended solution for three to five subsystems with redundant system buses

1.2.2 Communication capacity


A Router is one of the stations connected to a system bus. It is given a share in the bus capacity of
each subsystem just as any station connected to the system bus of the subsystem.

The maximum delay caused by the router in control room operations when the circuit operated is in a
different subsystem is 2s ("difference of control room operation response times"="response time of
operating a circuit in a different subsystem through router "-" response time of operation in the same
subsystem").

D:\Training\CD-Rom Documents\Course Documents\VME Stations Page 1 of 2


Hardware\System Bus\Other Doc\RTS.doc
Rev date:
Router Station Damatic XD
Marine System

1.2.3 Configuration
Automatic configuration of routing. No application configuration required.

NOTE!
Control room data shared by 2 or more subsystems require separate configuration for each subsystem,
in other words, shared circuits have to be taken into account in calculating the capacity of an operator
station and an alarm station.

D:\Training\CD-Rom Documents\Course Documents\VME Stations Page 2 of 2


Hardware\System Bus\Other Doc\RTS.doc
Rev date:
Repeater Station Damatic XD
Marine System

1 1 Repeater Station (RPS)

1.1 General
A Repeater Station is a signal repeater that is used for correcting level and time aberrations in long
process bus cables. Using RPS, longer process buses than 2 kilometer can be achieved.

1.2 Features
Each repeater station contains transformers and buffers for reception and transmission, filters and
amplifiers for connecting two buses.

Connection to branch node (TAP) goes through the transformers. In addition a repeater station allows
connecting to bus cables based on optical fibers. The connection is made using a Fiber Optics
Interface Unit (FOI), which is installed behind the Repeater Station motherboard.

The maximum distance for bus cables based on optical fibers depend on the type of the fibers and the
connectors used:

When using ST type the total damping ought to be less than 3.5 dB for type (50/125 ) and 8.5 dB for
type (62.5/125).
It is also possible to combine several repeaters by placing them in the same subrack.

1.3 Configuration
No application configuration required.

D:\Training\CD-Rom Documents\Course Documents\VME Stations Page 1 of 3


Hardware\System Bus\Other Doc\RPS.doc
Rev date:
Repeater Station Damatic XD
Marine System

1.4 Structure

Figure 1 Example of connecting the bus based on fiber optics

D:\Training\CD-Rom Documents\Course Documents\VME Stations Page 2 of 3


Hardware\System Bus\Other Doc\RPS.doc
Rev date:
Repeater Station Damatic XD
Marine System

1.5 Repeater Connection Examples

Figure 2 Repeater connection examples

D:\Training\CD-Rom Documents\Course Documents\VME Stations Page 3 of 3


Hardware\System Bus\Other Doc\RPS.doc
Rev date:
VALMARINE

Field Bus
Ê General
Ê Redundant Field Bus
Ê The components conn. The field bus.
Ê Types of Field Buses
Ê O
Other documents
VALMARINE
G
General
l connection
ti principle
i i l

System Bus Process Station


(PCS)
Station side
The field bus is connected the
FBC card in the PCS. Field Bus

IO-Racks with
IO - side the IO-cards

The field bus is connected to


the PIC card.

2
VALMARINE
Fi ld B
Field Bus cable
bl and
d termination
t i ti

3
VALMARINE
Fi ld Bus
Field B with
ith redundant
d d t PCS

4
VALMARINE
R d d t PCS
Redundant

5
VALMARINE
R d Fi
Red. Field
ld bus,
b single
i l PCS

6
Summary
VALMARINE
St d d Fi
Standard Field
ld Bus
B
The process controll stations
Th i communicate
i with
i h the
h I/O subracks
b k through
h h the
h field
fi ld bus,
b
which is a coaxial cable up to 400 m...4 km long. Maximum length of the field bus
depends on the cable type. Transmission rate on the field bus is 1 Mbit/s. The HDLC
protocol is used in data transmission on the bus, and cyclic redundancy code (CRC) is
used to detect erroneous data; retransmission is used to correct incorrect data.
The field
Th fi ld bus
b isi connected
t d to
t I/O subrack
b k through
th h Process
P Interface
I t f Controller
C t ll (PIC) andd
to process control station through Field Bus Controller (FBC).
Up to 16 groups of I/O units can be connected to one field bus
bus.
I/O unit bus
The I/O units are connected to the subrack's process interface controller (PIC) through
the I/O unit bus. Communications on the bus correspond to the RS-485 standard, and the
transmission rate is 375 Kbit/s.
I/O fi
field
ld b
bus
I/O field bus is a maximum 200 m long single or redundant bus that connects embedded
I/O to I/O subrack. Bus type is RS-485 and it is twisted pair cable as physical
construction.

7
VALMARINE
FBC2/FBC32

8
VALMARINE
PIC2

9
VALMARINE
PICR

10
Different type of Field
VALMARINE Buses
Process Control
Process Control Station
max. 16 PIC (R) per FBC
max. 16 PCR / ECR per FBC

Field Bus 1 Mbits/s


(single / redundant)
fiber 2 km
km, coax
coax. 4 km

Field Bus 10 Mbits/s


Ethernet
thin 185 m /
twisted pair 100 m /
fiber 2 km

I/O Field Bus


(single / redundant)
375 kBit/s
twisted pair 250 m

Intelligent I/O Field Bus


750 kBit/s
t i t d pair
twisted i 20 m

11
REDUNDANT PCS
MAIN RESERVE
PROCESS NETWORK
VALMARINE
FBC FBC
C
Coax Fi
FieldBus
ldB
UP TO 2 FBC PICR = PROCESS INTERFACE
PER PCS RACK I/O CONTROLLER REMOTE
(MAIN AND
RES. EACH) FBC = FIELD BUS CONTROLLER
IN A 6 SLOTS FPUS = FIELD POWER UNIT STANDBY
BASIC I/O CABINET
MODULE

FPUS 24VDC
EMBEDDED I/O
FIELD BUS I/O FIELD BUS (TWISTED PAIR) 375kbit/s
375kbit/ 4 I/O CARD SLOTS
PICR UP TO 32 SIGNALS
(COAX OR
FIBER OPTIC) 24VDC
1Mbit/s 24VDC UP TO 8 UNITS
PER PICR

UP TO 16 UNITS
220VAC
PER PICR
MOTOR CONTROLLER
3 I/O CARD SLOTS
FOR UP TO 3 MOTORS
MAX. 16 PICR
PER FBC

12
REDUNDANT PCS
MAIN RESERVE
PROCESS NETWORK
VALMARINE
MOI MOI
Fib FieldBus
Fibre Fi ldB
PICR = PROCESS INTERFACE
RACK I/O CONTROLLER REMOTE
FBOI FBOI MOI = MULTI OPTICAL INTERFACE
UP TO 12
FIBER OPTIC FBOI = FIBEROPTIC INTERFACE
BRANCHES
I/O CABINET

FBOI PICR

FBOI PICR

FBOI PICR

FBOI PICR

FBOI PICR
UP TO 4 FBOI
SEGMENTS
PER BRANCH

FBOI PICR

13
REDUNDANT PCS
MAIN RESERVE
PROCESS NETWORK
Coax & Fibre
VALMARINE
MOI
Fi ldB
FieldBus
PICR = PROCESS INTERFACE
RACK I/O CONTROLLER REMOTE
FBOI MOI = MULTI OPTICAL INTERFACE
UP TO 12 UP TO 12
FIBER OPTIC FBOI = FIBEROPTIC INTERFACE
GALVANIC ISOLATED
BRANCHES COAXIAL BRANCHES

PICR

FBOI PICR

PICR

FBOI PICR

PICR

FBOI PICR

14
VALMARINE
St d d drawings
Standard d i

Internal connection of Field Bus in I/O Cabinet


Field Bus -->
> PIC Card : T10073 .pdf
pdf

Internal connection of Field Bus in System Cabinet


Field Bus --> FBC Card : T10082 .pdf

Connection between PICR and Embedded IO : P30128 .pdf

15
VALMARINE
Oth documents
Other d t

Optical Field Bus : OpticalFieldBus.pdf

16
A B C D E F

8 8

7 7

6 6

5 5

4 4

3 3

2 2
right. Misapplication in particular reproduction or handling
issuance of a patent and registration of another industrial
All rights are reserved for this drawing, even in case of

over to third persons is prohibited, it is civilly and

1 Project Title & Number Drawing Title 1


Internal Connection of Field Bus
Standard Drawing
I/O Cabinet
criminally actionable.

Revision Revision Note Date Initials Initial Design Drawing Number Rev.No.
A0 First Issue 25.05.00 HES Initials Date T10073 A
A1 New Drawing Frame 29.10.01 FHB Drawn HES 25.05.00
CAD File Sh. No. No.of.Sh.
Checked PAB 05.07.00
File T10073A1 T10073A1 1 1

A B C D E F
Optical Field Bus Damatic XD
Marine System

1 1 Optical Field Bus

1.1 1.1 General


The field bus optical interface kit for use inside equipment room.

Figure 1 Fiber optical field bus inside equipment room

Figure 2 Fiber optical field bus inside equipment room (PIC R)

D:\Training\CD-Rom Documents\Course Documents\VME Stations Page 1 of 3


Hardware\Field Bus\Other doc\OpticalFieldBus.doc
Rev date:
Optical Field Bus Damatic XD
Marine System

The field bus optical interface kit for long distance for use between equipment rooms.

Figure 3 Fiber optical field bus for long distance

Figure 4 Fiber optical field bus for long distance (PIC R)

Multiple optical interface unit (MOI) has 6 optical interfaces. It is possible to connect 6 FBOI1 units
to one MOI using star type topology.

MOI is connected at FBC 32 unit behind the VMV motherboard.

FBOI1 unit changes fiber optical field bus to coaxial field bus.
Fiber optical connectors are ST type and optical cables with 62.5/125 fibers are recommended.

D:\Training\CD-Rom Documents\Course Documents\VME Stations Page 2 of 3


Hardware\Field Bus\Other doc\OpticalFieldBus.doc
Rev date:
Optical Field Bus Damatic XD
Marine System

FBOI1 hasn't possibility to continue optical field bus to other FBOI1 unit. If there is need to continue
optical field bus to other FBOI1 unit, it's possible by using FBOI unit.
The optical field bus maximum distance from MOI to FBOI1 depends on the optical cable's type and
on the attenuation caused by possible connections on the line. For ST type connectors maximum fiber
length is approximately 2 km and total attenuation (cable and connections) must be less than 8.5 dB.

D:\Training\CD-Rom Documents\Course Documents\VME Stations Page 3 of 3


Hardware\Field Bus\Other doc\OpticalFieldBus.doc
Rev date:
VALMARINE

DNA Controlroom & Process Stations

Ê Stations
VALMARINE
General
G l
In the Damatic DNA system the Operator Station (OPS), (OPS) Alarm Processor (ALP),
(ALP) Backup Station (BU) and Diagnostic
Station (DIA) belong to the Control Room group of Stations.
The hardware platform is a marine type approved desktop computer. The computer is positioned on a mounting plate with
vibration dampers, and the assembly is intended for mounting on top of or inside control room consoles (as an option the
computer can also be built into own cabinets).
cabinets) It is redundantly connected to the System Communication Network.
Network Operating
power is fed from UPS.
Current Operating system platform is MS Windows 2000 Pro. Due to the multitasking environment different stations can be
installed on the same computer, e.g. ALP and OPS together.
The introduction of MS Windows as operating system in the control room environment has enabled easier access to system
related documentation on web platform, as well as openness for implantation of other windows based programs.
From a maintenance point of view all the desktop computers are of same type. A specially designed maintenance tool for
back up and restore of computer hard disk software is delivered with the system. This makes it easy to configure a computer
for another station set-up (replace functions in case of faulty computer)
computer).

2
VALMARINE
Control Room Stations

3
VALMARINE
O
Operation
ti Station
St ti General
G l

Keyboard
arrangement

Monitor arrangement

4
VALMARINE
Operation Station
The Damatic DNA OPS sets the focus on the operator’s main tasks, such as setting the operation mode, monitoring the
pprocess,, managing
g g changes
g in the process
p and handlingg disturbances,, all in an efficient and safe manner.
The MMI consists of from one to three monitors, and a keyboard that incorporates function keys, standard keyboard keys and
a trackball. The operation is basically screen oriented by use of trackball and an activation key. The standard VDU is 19.1”
Thin Film Transistor (TFT) monitor.
The OPS monitors displayp y full ggraphic
p pictures,, combining
p g the stored static p part with dynamic
y data requested
q from the
various Process Stations, e.g. process information and status of machinery. After a link is established between the graphic
picture and respective process stations, dynamic data on the monitor is typically updated at 1-second rate.
The OPS includes login and user rights as well as transfer of operation responsibility between control rooms.
In order to improve
p the operators
p working g environment the OPS supports
pp access to documentation in electronic format,,
avoiding time consuming search for information in paper binders. The OPS can as well serve as a operator interface client for
other systems like APIS data and event logger system, Damatic Manoeuvre Recorder and Napa Load and Stability Computer

5
VALMARINE
Monitor Display Example
.

6
VALMARINE
Alarm Station
The Alarm Processor (ALP) processes events for display on Operator Stations and printing on the Event Printer. The ALP can
also communicate with external event analyse and storage programs like Damatic Event Explorer
Explorer.
Each sub system within the Damatic DNA system, like Machinery and HVAC systems, has normally their own ALP. The
ALP can be configured redundant where main ALP is located to one control room computer and the reserve to another.
Process or System events are converted into either alarms or messages. Events can be grouped according to the selected
grouping criteria in different listings (maximum 64).
64) Two different acoustic (horn) groups can be defined for each ALP,
ALP
corresponding to different colours (alarm priority) of the alarm text displayed in the alarm list.
Alarm Header Window on the OPS shows the oldest unacknowledged alarms and numbers of unacknowledged alarms per
group. In addition the window contains a toolbar with soft buttons for log-in/out, alarm acknowledge, alarm browsing etc.
The OPS Alarm Display presents the alarms in a list format
format. The alarm timestamp resolution can be as low as 20 ms for
binary (digital) inputs. Alarms are sorted according the time stamp. The alarm list can then be used as a faultfinding tool to
locate the origin of a failure.

In the Process mimics alarms are visualised by change of object colour to red
red. A dynamic link between the alarms in the
alarm list and the process mimics enables quick change from the alarm list to the process mimic where the alarm is
connected .

7
VALMARINE
Alarm Station

Basic arrangement
g and peripheral
p p equipment
q p off the ALP node

8
VALMARINE
Alarm List

9
VALMARINE
Backup and Diagnastic Stations
Backup Station

The Backup Station (BU) contains the configuration software for all stations in the system. When a station is started up after
having been switched off the BU will automatically download the configuration software for the station. The BU is also
periodically storing backup data, like parameter settings, from Process Control and Gateway Stations

Diagnastic Station

The Diagnostic Station (DIA) is used by CAE Valmarine personnel for debugging of application programs, system
troubleshooting and for software maintenance purposes. The DIA is not required for normal operation of the system
Damatic DNA system
y

10
Process Stations
Stations
VALMARINE

VME Process Station

ACN Process Station

11
VALMARINE

Stations
Ê XOPS, X-
X-Operator Station
Ê XDS, X
X--Display Server
Ê ALP, Alarm Processor
Ê LIS, Logical Interface Station
Ê CIS, Computer Interface Station
Ê PCS, Process Station
Ê BU,
BU Backup Unit
VALMARINE
XOPS
Operator Stations serve the operator who controls the process
process. Through them the
operator receives information on the process and enters control commands to the
process. There is two windows pr. Monitor, the windows are re-sizeable.

The X-OPerator
X OPerator Station consists of the following station cards:

2 x CPU60 (e), slot 1 & 3


1 x GDU2 or GDU1, slot 2
1 x DMU16/32/64 MbMb, slot
l t4

GDU2 is used when we have two Monitors and one Keyboard

GDU1 is used when we have one Monitor and one Keyboard

Whether we use DMU16, 32 or 64Mbyte additional memory depends on the amount of


mimics in the system.

Connection Priniciple: Basic Module with XOPS station cards

Standard drawings of connection with ECU: T10091.dwg


Standard drawings of connection without ECU: T10081.dwg

2
VALMARINE
XDS
X Display Station (XDS) servers the operator who controls the process using PC or
workstation. Through them the operator receives information on the process and enters
control commands to the process.

The XDS consists of the following station cards:

1 x CPU60 (e), slot 1


1 x DMU16/32/64 Mb, slot 2

Whether we use DMU16, 32 or 64Mbyte additional memory depends on the amount of


mimics in the system.

Connection Priniciple: Basic Module with XDS station cards

Standard drawings of connection inside cabinet: T10084.dwg

3
Alarm Station
VALMARINE
ALP
Alarm Station collect information on process events and send the information to the operator
station (XOPS). The ALP consist of

1x CPU
1x RSU for additional printers if required

On the CPU there is one RS232/RS422 channel which can be used for the Printer output.
p
Normally we use an RS422 interface on the printer.

There are also two binary outputs for the alarm horns. The outputs are wired internally to two
y in the cabinet.
standard 24VDC relays

Connection principle: ALP.jpg

Standard drawing of internal wireing: T10086 dwg


T10086.dwg

Standard drawing, conn. To horn: T10087.dwg

4
Logical Interface Station
VALMARINE
LIS
A PLC-interface is used for connecting Programmable Logic Controllers to Damatic XD via a
serial link or Ethernet TCP/IP
In addition the station features a tool that allows free p
protocol configuration
g to make the station
compatible with equipment outside the standard range which use an asynchronous link
protocol.
The station consists of the following
g cards:
1xCPU, slot 1
1xRSU, slot 2 if more than one RS line is required.
Th CPU h
The has one channel
h l either
ith RS422,
RS422 RS232 or Ethernet.
Eth t
The RSU have 6 RS channels where no 1 & 2 must be jumpered whether they are using RS232
or RS422. The next four channels does not need any jumpering.

Connection principle: LIS.jpg

Standard Drawing, Internal connections: T10080.dwg

5
Computer Interface Station
VALMARINE
CIS
The Process Computer Interface Station (Gateway
(Gateway, GTW) performs the following functions:
• Connects an external computer to the Damatic XD system (Report PC, Man.rec.PC)
• Collects the data sent to the computer
• Transfers the commands and data from the computer to the system bus and through it to
the different stations of Damatic XD
In a GTW:CIS station the connection can be implemented either using multiple RS-channels
RS channels or
via the Ethernet network.
Using a Process Computer Interface Station computers with the following protocols can be
connected to the system:
• TEK-126 or TEK-235
• CNP (Configurable and Name based Protocol).

The station consists of:

1xCPU

General connection principle: CIS.jpg

6
VALMARINE
P
Process Station
St ti General
G l
Process Control Stations connect the Damatic XD system to the controlled
process. In addition to basic functions and I/Os related to them, a process
control station is also able to handle group starts, sequences, recipes,
trend history collection and also advanced calculations for supervisory
level controls.

I/O Interface functions:


Some functions:
• A/D,
A/D D/A conversion
• Measurements, analogue controls
• Transmitter supply
• Alarm Detection
• Supply line monitoring
• Valve Controls
• Signal Filtering
• Motor Controls
• Test Points
• Interlocking
• Simulation Switches
• Logic Controls
• Over-Current/Voltage protection
• Sequence Controls
• Binary Time Stamping
• Calulations and, optimization funct.
• Trending

7
Single Process Station
VALMARINE
PCS w/one
/ Fi
Field
ld Bus
B

A Single Process station with one field bus consist of the following station cards:

1xCPU
1xFBC

The Field Bus Connects the FBC in the station and the PIC in the IO rack.

General Layout and connection principle: PCS_SingleFBC.jpg

Note that the Field bus is terminated in both ends with a 75 Ohms Terminator.

With one FBC, maximum 16 I/O-racks can be connected. They are numbered 0-15.

8
Single Process Station
VALMARINE
PCS w/Two
/T FBC’
FBC’s
Purpose off two FBC’s:
C Extend the I/O
/O with 16 more racks

A Single Process station with two field bus consist of the following station cards:

1xCPU
2xFBC

The Field Bus Connects the FBC’s in the station and the PIC cards in the IO rack.

General Layout and connection principle: PCS_DoubleFBC.jpg

Note that the Field bus is terminated in both ends with a 75 Ohms Terminator.

With two FBC’s we now have 32 I/O racks in one PCS.

9
Single Process Station
VALMARINE
PCS w/Red
/R d FBC
Purpose off two FBC’s:
C Field Bus redundancy

A Single Process station with red field bus consist of the following station cards:

1xCPU
2xFBC

The Field Bus Connects the FBC’s in the station and the PIC cards in the IO rack.

General Layout and connection principle: PCS_RedFBC.jpg

Note that the Field bus is terminated in both ends with a 75 Ohms Terminator.

Now still with two FBC’s we only have 16 I/O racks available.

10
Redundant Process Station
VALMARINE
together
t th with
ith NCU2 netw.card
t d
A Redundant Process station consist of the following station cards:

2xCPU
2xFBC

But they are splitted in two basic modules, and most commonly the basic modules are in
two different cabinets. So in each basic module there is only 1xCPU and 1xFBC.

The Field Bus Connects the FBC’s in the station and the PIC cards in the IO rack.

General Layout and connection principle: RedPCS.htm

Note that the Field bus is terminated in both ends with a 75 Ohms Terminator.

Now still with two FBC’s we only have 16 I/O racks available. It is possible to extend the no.
of I/O-racks if you put two FBC’s in each basic module.

11
Redundant Process Station
VALMARINE
together
t th with
ith old
ld NCU netw.card
t d

The reason why we split the documentation for NCU and NCU2 is because of the difference
in the System bus wireing.

A Redundant Process station consist of the following station cards:

2xCPU
2xFBC

But they are splitted in two basic modules, and most commonly the basic modules are in
two different cabinets
cabinets. So in each basic module there is only 1xCPU and 1xFBC
1xFBC.

The Field Bus Connects the FBC’s in the station and the PIC cards in the IO rack.

General Layout and connection principle: RedPCS2.htm

N t th
Note thatt th
the Field
Fi ld bus
b isi terminated
t i t d in
i both
b th ends
d with
ith a 75 Ohms
Oh Terminator.
T i t

Now still with two FBC’s we only have 16 I/O racks available. It is possible to extend the no.
of I/O-racks if you put two FBC’s in each basic module.

12
Backup Unit
VALMARINE
BU
The BU consists of the following Station Cards:
1x CPU
1x ESW
Any configuration changes are loaded on-line to the system's different stations via
the Backup Station which is connected to the system bus.
The Backup Station's disk storage contains the configuration of each station
connected to the bus. In a failure situation the automatic Backup function will load
the configuration to the affected station.
station

General layout and connection principle: BU_HW1.jpg

13
Diagnostic Station
VALMARINE
DIA
The DIA consists of the following Station Cards:

1x CPU

The DIA will normally be placed in slot no. 3 together with the BU station. The diagnostics station
(DIA) debugger program tool has been designed for examining the Damatic XD automation
system and the internal workings of system applications.

Connections on the VMV motherboard is only used by the engineer from CAE Valmarine when
necessary (VMV connections.jpg)

For an operator the system generates alarms and messages on the basis of which the user can
determine what effects the fault has and if service is required. Will be gone through later in this
course.
For maintenance the diagnostics points out exactly the faulty bus, station or plug-in unit and also
indicates faults in field instrument connections.
The automation designer is supported in his editing work in several ways.
ways For instance
instance, he is told
if the right I/O unit is found in the correct slot; whether the system has resources available for
executing the changes; whether problems encountered in executing the changes are liable to
make the application inoperable.
The automation designer is also given the necessary tools for application testing: the Graphic
Testing Function and also the List Mode Testing Function. 14
Router Station
VALMARINE
RTS
A Router Station consists of the following cards:
1x CPU
1x NCU2 (or 2x NCU)

The number of NCU’s(NCU or NCU2) depends of how many system busses to be


connected.
A Router links can link up to four system buses together as transparently as
possible, so that the same principles apply to communication between stations
using the same bus or different buses.
buses

15
VALMARINE
Al
Alarmlist
li t

16
VALMARINE

S
Station C
Card
Ê General
Ê Different cards
VALMARINE
G
General
l
The Station
Th St ti C Cards
d are 3E sized.
i d Th
They will
ill stay
t ini basic
b i modules
d l ini System
S t Cabinets.
C bi t TheTh
system cabinets consist of

1 swing frame, where all the electronic cards are placed.

1 cabinet where the swing frame is connected.

Between the swing frame and cabinet there is connection cables. These cables are on the back
plate of the cabinet connected to an EMC box. The yard connects their cables INSIDE the EMC
box. All cabling OUTSIDE the EMC box is done by CAE Valmarine.

Note that the EMC box was introduced in the recent years. So old vessels does not have this
EMC box. Picture of the EMC Box.

2
VALMARINE
Central
C t l Processing
P i Unit
U it (CPU)
The CPU is off course a central card in the system
system.

⇒ Each station has at least one CPU card

⇒ CPU card is ALWAYS the first card in a basic module

There is different sizes of the CPU, depending


p g of the demand
of capacity. The different types are:

CPU60 32M
CPU60e 32M
CPU40 16M/32M
CPU40e 16/32M

The “e”
e type is a more advanced version of CPU
CPU. New
features include e.g. 32 bits wide VME bus and dual ported
memory, fault correction for dynamic memory as well as
higher clock frequency.

3
VALMARINE
CPU llamp indication1
i di ti 1

RES = Processor has stopped

4
VALMARINE
CPU llamp iindication
di ti 2

The parallel interface of Multifunction Circuit 1 comprises two binary inputs or outputs, PON
signal from the VPU power supply, RST signal for standby-processor use, RUN indicator
lamp control,
control updating of the watchdog logic
logic, standby processor status (RCSTAT)
(RCSTAT), and
software switchover to standby-processor (SCO). The watchdog logic monitors the program
exceution and the condition of the card. If the watchdog is not updated through multifunction
circuit at 50 ms intervals (or at shorter intervals), it will generate an alarm by setting the
SYSWDOK signal to the "0" state. When this happens, the WDF (Watchdog) lamps lighted
on the front panel of the card. At a station not provided with redundancy, a watchdog alarm
will cause a program reset through the SYSRESET signal; in a redundantly configured
system an alarm will cause a switchover to the standby processor.

WDF=Watchdog logic

5
VALMARINE
CPU llamp indication
i di ti 3

The parallel interface of Multifunction Circuit 2 comprises the card address and the dual
ported memory interrupt signal. It is also used to monitor and control the SYSFAIL signal of
the VME bus; when control is on, the SF lamp is lighted on the front panel of the card.

SF = System Failure 6
VALMARINE
CPU llamp indication
i di ti 4

VME & DPR

The CPU can function as VME bus master or as bus slave. It functions as a SLAVE module
when some other card is using its dual ported RAM memory from the VME bus. The DPR
(Dual Ported RAM) indicator lamp is then lighted on its front panel
panel. When the VME indicator
lamp is lighted, the CPU functions as a MASTER module executing memory operations on
the VME busCPU is performing data transfare on VME-bus

7
VALMARINE
CPU llamp indication
i di ti 5

VMX

CPU is
i using
i ththe VMX b
bus

8
VALMARINE
CPU llamp indication
i di ti 6

SBY & RUN

SBY = CPU standby

RUN = CPU is active

9
CPU
VALMARINE
VMV Connectors
C t
Now we see the the VMV motherboard from the rear of the swing
swing--
frame. We are now going to point out the most important
connections for the CPU card.

Connection
C ti ffor th
the RCOK cable bl used
d in
i redundant
d d t
PCS. We will see this later also

Connection
C ti ffor HORN 11. E
E.g. ffor A
Audio/
di / Visual
Vi l
device in engine room. Used when CPU is used as
an alarm station (ALP).

Additional aud/vis device; HORN 2. ALP

Remote debugger connection. Used with diagnostic


station; DIA. Used by CAE Valmarine eng.

RS 422 line. Conn. To alarm printer when CPU is


used as an ALP. Keyboard conn. When CPU is
used as a Operator station (XOPS). Can also be
used as a serial line conn. To external systems
when CPU is used as a GTW:LIS.
10
CPU
VALMARINE
VMV Connectors
C t

RS232 line
line. Can be used as a serial line connection.
connection
To external systems when CPU is used as a
GTW:LIS.

11
Central Processing Unit (CPU)
VALMARINE
S
Summary

In a basic module the card in slot no. 1 MUST ALWAYS be a CPU card. Then in combination with
other cards and the way the engineer is programming the basic software we can decide the
function of the CPU card.
card The function of the cards in a basic module will form what we call a
STATION.

Before we go on and talk about the different stations we will go through the rest of the station
cards.
d

12
VALMARINE
D
Dynamic
i MMemory Unit
U it (DMU)

When there is two less memory capacity in the CPU we can


add more memory with this card. It is placed next to the
CPU. ((e.g.
g if CPU is in slot no. 1 then DMU will be in slot no.
2).

We will see later (stations) that there is a connection on the


VMX motherboard between the CPU and DMU (ribbon
cable).

13
VALMARINE
DMU llamp iindication
di ti 1

VMX = The card is being addressed from VMX bus

14
VALMARINE
DMU llamp iindication
di ti 2

PE = Parity error

Data from CPU is wrong.

15
Graphical Display Unit
VALMARINE
GDU1 / GDU2

The GDU card is used in Operator Station (XOPS) and is


controlling the graphic displays.

There is two types of the GDU card:

1. GDU1 : Handles 1 monitor

2 GDU2
2. : Handles
H dl 2 monitors
it

Graphic Display Unit GDU consists of a video memory where


the picture is written as a bit map, control electronics and a
graphics circuit which produces analogue colour and sync
signals.

Resolution in selectable by software from three alternative


(1152*900, 1024*768, 640*480). That gives a possibility to use
different kind of monitors.

GDU connects with the CPU through VMX or VME bus. The
interface to be used is selected with a jumper (X6 = VMX). The
data bus width in both interfaces is 32 bits.

16
VALMARINE
GDU2 llamp iindication
di ti 1

VM1,VM2
PE = Data=from
CPU Parity
is executing
error memory cycle for
channel 1 or 2.

17
VALMARINE
GDU2 llamp iindication
di ti 2

PE = Data from Parity error


GC1,GC2= Video control circuit is executing transfer

to video memory channel 1 or 2.

18
GDU card
VALMARINE
VMV Connectors
C t

Second Monitor
R
G
B

First Monitor
R
G
B
19
VALMARINE
FBC32

The FBC32 is used with the Process Station (PCS). It will


ALWAYS be next to the CPU card in a PCS.

FBC32 is a Field Bus Controller that connects a process


control server (PCS) to the I/O sub racks. An FBC32 is able
to handle less than 16 I/O sub racks.

FBC32 connects with CPU and NCU via the VME bus.

FBC32 operates as the field bus' primary node which


h dl the
handles th traffic
t ffi on the
th bus.
b Process
P Interface
I t f
Controllers (PIC) cannot send messages to the bus on their
own initiative, but they can reply to transmission requests
from
o FBC32.
C3
So it is the FBC32 on the Station side and the PIC on the
IO-side which connects the field bus together.
There are two types of the card
FBC32 1M (DRAM)
FBC32 2M (DRAM)

20
VALMARINE
FBC32 lamp
l indication
i di ti 1

RES = Processor has stopped


pp

21
VALMARINE
FBC32 lamp
l indication
i di ti 2

The watchdog logic monitors the program execution and the condition of the card. If the
watchdog is not updated through multifunction circuit at 50 ms intervals (or at shorter
intervals), it will generate an alarm by setting the SYSWDOK signal to the "0" state. When
this happens,
happens the WDF (Watchdog) lamps lighted on the front panel of the card
card. At a station
not provided with redundancy, a watchdog alarm together with CPU will cause a program
reset with the SYSRESET signal; in a redundantly configured system an alarm will cause a
switchover to the standby processor. .

WDF=Watchdog logic

22
VALMARINE
FBC32 lamp
l indication
i di ti 3

to The parallel interface is used to monitor and control the VME bus's SYSFAIL*
signal, receive the VME dual ported memory's write interrupt, and to update the
watchdog logic. While FBC 32 is driving the SYSFAIL signal, the SF lamp is lighted on
the front panel of the card.

SF

23
VALMARINE
FBC32 lamp
l indication
i di ti 4

VME

FBC is performing data transfare on VME-bus

24
VALMARINE
FBC32 lamp
l indication
i di ti 5

Dual ported RAM memory is being used from VME bus.

DPR

25
VALMARINE
FBC32 lamp
l indication
i di ti 6

Traffic on field bus. ( Field bus active ).

FBA

26
FBC
VALMARINE
VMV C
Connections
ti

On the VMV Motherboard the field bus connection is


done. This cable which goes from the VMV motherboard
on the swing
g frame to the back plate
p of the cabinet (or
(
EMC) are pre-wired by CAE Valmarine.

The yard connects to the back plate (or EMC box).

Main/Reserve
Field Bus

Main/Reserve
/
Field Bus

27
VALMARINE
FBC2

This card is “almost” the same as FBC32 but it can ALSO connect to Intelligent Embedded I/O via
standard ethernet 50 Ohm.

For conventional IO it has the same VMV connections as FBC32

It has two more led’s on the card front plate

TX0 (yellow) Ethernet Transmission

RX0 (yellow) Ethernet Reception

but will off course not be in use when connected to conventional rack IO.

28
VALMARINE
RSU6

The RSU6 card is used together with the GTW:LIS. So the card is
placed next to the CPU card.

A we remember
As b ththe CPU card
dhhas ttwo channels
h l it
itself
lf

1 RS422
1 RS232

The RSU card has totally 6 channels for RS lines.

The two first channels are located on the VMX mother board and
we have
h to
t dod some jump
j ring
i on the
th RSU cardd whether
h th it should
h ld
be RS232 or RS422.

The 4 next channels are located on the VMV motherboard and we


don’t need to do anyjump ringg here.

16 baud rates between 50 baud and 38.4 k. baud can be selected


from the internal baud rate clock for asynchronous
communications. The number of data bits and stop bits as well as
parity can also be selected through software.

Data transfer between serial I/O circuits and processor takes


place through software.
29
VALMARINE
RSU6 lamp
l indication
i di ti 1

WDF = Processor has


stopped

30
VALMARINE
RSU6 lamp
l indication
i di ti 2

RES = Watchdog logic

The watchdog
Th t hd logic
l i monitors it program execution
ti and d the
th condition
diti off the
th card.d If the
th
watchdog is not updated through the multifunction circuit at 60 ms intervals (or at
shorter intervals), it will generate an alarm by setting the SYSWDOK signal to the '0'
state. When this happens,
pp , the WDF ((Watchdog)
g) lampp is lighted
g on the front panel
p of
the card. A watchdog alarm will cause a program restart in the station with the
SYSRESET signal. . .

31
VALMARINE
RSU6 lamp
l indication
i di ti 3

SF = System failure

The Multifunction
Th M ltif ti Circuit
Ci it 68901 comprises
i an 8-bit
8 bit parallel
ll l I/O
I/O, interrupt
i t t controller,
t ll
four timers, and serial I/O. The parallel I/O is used to monitor and control the VME
bus's SYSFAIL signal, to update the watchdog logic, to generate VME interrupt
requests,
q , and to select the VME interrupt
p levels. While RSU 6 is driving g the SYSFAIL
signal, the SF lamp is lighted on the front panel of the card.

The serial I/O is not in use. 32


VALMARINE
RSU6 lamp
l indication
i di ti 4

VME

RSU6 is performing data transfer operation on VME bus

33
VALMARINE
RSU6 lamp
l indication
i di ti 5

DPR

RSU6 Dual port memory is being addressed from VME bus

34
RSU6
VALMARINE
VMX C
Connections
ti

The two first channels are located on the VMX


motherboard.

Channel 1

Channel 2

Note that there are two different connectors one


“small”
small for RS232 and one “big”
big for RS422
RS422.

35
RSU6
VALMARINE
VMV C
Connections
ti
The next four channels is located on the VMV
motherboard

Channel 3

Channel 4

Ch
Channel
l5

Ch
Channel
l6

Note that there are two different connectors one


“small” for RS232 and one “big” for RS422.
36
VALMARINE
RSU6 J
Jumpers

As mentioned the two first channels of the RSU6 card must be jump red
whether we are using RS232 or RS422. The following jumpers are then taken
into consideration:

37
VALMARINE
Repeater
R t StStation
ti (RPT2)
RPT2 is a repeater unit which is used to correct level and time
distortions in a long (over 2 km) process bus cable. RPT2's TTL-
level inputs and outputs also permit the use of an optical fibre
process bus.
b
Several RPT2 cards can be used to configure a process bus star
network (max. 6 cards = 12 branches).

38
VALMARINE
RPT2 lamp
l indication
i di ti

39
RPT2
VALMARINE
VMV C
Connections
ti

40
Ethernet SCSI Winchester
VALMARINE
ESW
The ESW is used together with a CPU to form the Backup
Unit. The CPU is then normally in slot no. 1 and the ESW
in slot 2 & 3 (takes 2 slots).

They comprise one (ESW1) or two (ESW2) hard disks with


SCSI (Small Computer System Interface), an SCSI
controller and Ethernet interface. ESW does not have its
own processor: its operation is controlled by the CPU
through VME bus.

During
D i engineering
i i the
th CAE Valmarine
V l i engineer
i connects
t
the Engineering Environment (DES) through a ESA card
on the VMX/VMV motherboard. The cable to the eng.
network is 50 Ohm standard Ethernet cable. This
connection does NOT need to be there after
commissioning but are connected again when a service
engineer comes onboard to do changes in the system.

41
VALMARINE
ESW lamp
l indication
i di ti 1

RES = SYSRESET ON VME

42
VALMARINE
ESW lamp
l indication
i di ti 2

SDP = DMA transfer on SCSI DPRAM

The SDP lamp is blinking when the card is communicating on the VME bus .

43
VALMARINE
ESW lamp
l indication
i di ti 3

EDP = DMA transfer on EtherneI DPRAM

The EDP lamp is blinking when the card is communicating on the ethernet .

44
VALMARINE
ESW lamp
l indication
i di ti 4

The HD1 lamp is blinking when the card is communicating on the hard disk

HD1 = Data transfer on hard disk 1. 45


Network Communication Unit:
Unit:
VALMARINE
NCU

NCU Card (Network communication


U it)
Unit)
Located in each and every station. Takes care of the

communication
i ti between
b t stations.
t ti Thi
This is
i the
th old
ld

network card. There is one NCU card for Main bus

(slot 6) and one for the Reserve bus (slot 5).

Between the stations there are a thin wire Ethernet


cable, 75ς.

Transmission rate = 2MBit/s

The size is 3E.


3E

46
VALMARINE
NCU lamp
l indication
i di ti 1

RES = Processor has stopped

47
VALMARINE
NCU lamp
l indication
i di ti 2

The watchdog logic monitors program execution and the condition of the card. If the
watchdog is not updated through the multifunction circuit at 60 ms intervals (or at
shorter intervals), it will generate an alarm by setting the SYSWDOK signal to the "0"
state. When this happens, the WDF (Watchdog) lamp is lighted on the front panel of
the card. A watchdog alarm together with the CPU card will cause a program restart
in the station with the SYSRESET signal.

WDF = Watchdog alarm

48
VALMARINE
NCU lamp
l indication
i di ti 3

The parallel interface is used to monitor and control the VME bus SYSFAIL signal, to
select the system bus coaxial cable
cable, to update the watchdog logic
logic, to generate VME
interrupts, and to select the serial interface baud rate. While NCU drives the SYSFAIL
signal, the SF lamp is lighted on the front panel of the card.

SF = System Failure

49
VALMARINE
NCU lamp
l indication
i di ti 4

VME & DPR

The NCU connects to the VME bus through bus master, 32 kilobyte dual ported memory,
real time clock,
real-time clock and VME interrupter.
interrupter The dual ported memory can be addressed by the
NCU's own processor as well as by other cards through the VME bus. The memory address
on the VME bus is determined by the card slot in the sub rack. The type of the VME bus is
A24, D16: the address bus is 24 bits wide, and the data bus 16 bits wide. The NCU can
function as VME bus master or as bus slave. It functions as a SLAVE module when some
other card is using its dual ported memory from the VME bus. The DPR (Dual Ported RAM)
indicator lamp is then lighted on its front panel. When the VME indicator lamp is lighted, the
NCU functions as a MASTER module executing memory operations on the VME bus bus.

50
VALMARINE
NCU lamp
l indication
i di ti 5

NCU connects to the system bus through modem


modem, serial I/O circuit and timer
timer.Data
Data is
transferred at 2 M bit/s on the system bus. Data transfer is carried out at base frequency,
and NCU’s are isolated with transformers from the bus. Separate reception and
transmission cables are connected from TAP to NCU.When receiving a valid signal, the
DCD indicator lamp is lighted on the front panel of the NCU. When NCU is transmitting to
the system bus, the RTS lamp is lighted on the front panel.

RTS & DCD 51


Network Communication Unit:
Unit:
VALMARINE
NCU2

NCU2 Card (Network communication Unit)

Located in each and every station. Takes care of the


communication between stations. Now there is only
need for one NCU2 card for each station. On the
backside there is one adapter card which takes care
of the Main and Reserve Bus.

The NCU card is placed in slot 6 in a basic module.

The adapter card can be NCA (coax connection) or


NTA (TP connection).

Transmission rate = 10MBits/s

The size is 3E.

52
VALMARINE
NCU2 llamp iindication
di ti 1

RES = Processor has stopped

53
VALMARINE
NCU2 llamp iindication
di ti 2

WDF = Watchdog alarm

The watchdog logic monitors program execution and the condition of the card. The
watchdog logic has two steps
steps. If the watchdog is not updated at regular intervals the
processor's internal watchdog generates a 7-level break. In addition, the card has an
external watchdog which generates an alarm by setting the SYSWDOK signal to the "0"
state, unless the watchdog is updated at no less than 200 ms intervals. When this happens,
the WDF (Watchdog) lamp is lighted on the front panel of the card. A watchdog alarm
together with the CPU card will cause a program restart in the station with the SYSRESET
signal.

54
VALMARINE
NCU2 llamp iindication
di ti 3

RES
SF=
= Processor
System
y failure
has stopped
pp

The parallel interface is composed with MC68360 parallel interface signals and external
logic The parallel interface is used to monitor and control the VME bus SYSFAIL signal
logic. signal, to
update the watchdog logic, and to read the station and token addresses. While NCU 2
drives the SYSFAIL signal, the SF lamp is lighted on the front panel of the card.

55
VALMARINE
NCU2 llamp iindication
di ti 4

VME & DRP

The NCU connects to the VME bus through bus master, 32 kilobyte dual ported memory,
real time clock,
real-time clock and VME interrupter.
interrupter The dual ported memory can be addressed by the
NCU's own processor as well as by other cards through the VME bus. The memory address
on the VME bus is determined by the card slot in the sub rack. The type of the VME bus is
A24, D16: the address bus is 24 bits wide, and the data bus 16 bits wide. The NCU can
function as VME bus master or as bus slave. It functions as a SLAVE module when some
other card is using its dual ported memory from the VME bus. The DPR (Dual Ported RAM)
indicator lamp is then lighted on its front panel. When the VME indicator lamp is lighted, the
NCU functions as a MASTER module executing memory operations on the VME bus bus.

56
VALMARINE
NCU2 llamp iindication
di ti 5

When receiving a signal, the corresponding channel's indicator lamp


RDX1 or RDX2 is lighted on the front panel of the NCU 2. When
NCU 2 is transmitting to the process bus, the corresponding
channel's
channel s indicator lamp TXD1 or TXD2 is lighted on the front panel
panel.

TX 1 & RX 1

TX 2 & RX 2 57
VALMARINE
Ethernet
Eth t SCSI Adapter
Ad t (ESA)

The ESA card is connected to the ESW on the VMX/VMV


motherboard. Note that it is NOT connected to the CPU.

BNC connector for Ethernet cable

Sometimes we use a ECU card, then and ONLY then


this card is connected to the CPU
CPU. In this function
(backup unit) the ECU card will do the same as the
ESA card.

58
VALMARINE
EPROMS

In some of the cards there is need for EPROMS. The EPROMS are installed in production phase
when we are testing the system in our factory. The EPROM version depends of the type of card and
the date of production. In one basic module we should use the same type of e.g. CPU EPROMS if
there is several CPU’s.

There will be different EPROMS on e.g. the CPU card even for “sister” vessels.

It is important for that the service department knows the EPROM version onboard when they are
changing or sending spare parts onboard. There are own documents in the system manual which
tells the EPROM version.

59
VALMARINE
Change of Cards

Before you change the card you MUST turn off the Operating power
for that Basic Module (VPU).

It is important that you check both the JUMPER settings on the card
AND the EPROMS.

60
VALMARINE

Stations
Ê ACN ( Application Control Node )
Ê Process Station and Gateway :LIS
VALMARINE
ACN G
Generall
Process Control Stations (ACN) connect the DNA system to the controlled
process. In addition to basic functions and I/Os related to them, a process
control station is also able to handle group starts, sequences, recipes,
trend history collection and also advanced calculations for supervisory
level controls.
Some functions: I/O Interface functions:
Measurements, analogue controls •Transmitter A/D, D/A conversion

• Alarm Detection •supply


supply

• Valve Controls • Supply line monitoring

• Motor Controls • Signal Filtering

• Interlocking • Test Points

• Logic Controls • Simulation Switches

• Sequence Controls • Over-Current/Voltage protection

• Calculations and,
and optimisation functions.
functions • Binary Time Stamping

• Trending
2
VALMARINE
ACN G
Generall
In the Damatic DNA system the hardware platform is named “Application
Application Controller Node
Node” (ACN) while operating system
is Linux.
The ACN is a marine type approved industry computer. Components are carefully selected for optimal performance, low
lifecycle costs and long availability. The ACN is not including any rotating hard disk. The ACN unit is completely EMC
protectedd by
b theh housing.
h i Thi means that
This h no additional
ddi i l EMC filtering
fil i or protection i d i
devices are necessary for
f ACN
installation. The ACN is built for 19” rack installation. It is normally installed in a cabinet together with AC/DC power
supply and a backup battery unit. A cabinet can accommodate several ACN units.
The ACN communicates with the system y network via redundant Ethernet twisted p pair ((TP)) connection. It connects to
Damatic field bus via Ethernet to Field bus Converter unit (EFC). The EFC is normally installed in the same cabinet as the
ACN, but may also be distributed remotely. There are two types of EFC units; one that connects coaxial field bus and another
for fibre optic.
Th ACN can also
The l connectt serial
i l line
li interfaces,
i t f lik RS422,
like RS422 485,
485 232,
232 andd industry
i d t standard
t d d filed
fil d buses
b lik Foundation
like F d ti
Field Bus (FFb), Profibus or ASi bus. Damatic Intelligent I/O is connected via standard Ethernet. ACN cabinets can also host
I/O assemblies like Standard Rack I/O or Embedded I/O.

The Linux operating system makes it possible to combine PCS and GTW stations inside the same ACN unit with independent station software
codes. An ACN can then connect both hardwired I/O and serial lines. The ACN redundancy concept for PCS is same as for
the VME platform. Main and reserve PCS are loaded to different ACN units that can be located in different compartments /
fire zones. Update communication between main and reserve unit is redundant via Ethernet Switch units connecting ACN
with the system network.
If ACN hardware fails the faulty unit is replaced. A personality module, containing the station address is swapped from the
faulty unit. Cables are plugged-in again and the ACN will automatically download the station software from BU station when
power is
i switched-on
it h d ( for
(as f the
th VME platform).
l tf )

3
VALMARINE
ACN and
d I/O General
G l
The Damatic DNA Field bus connects the Process Control Station (PCS) with the I/O units. The Field bus can be single or
redundant with coax or fibre optic cables as communication media. Communication speed is 1 Mbps.
On the PCS side the bus connects to an Ethernet to Field bus Converter (EFC). The EFC is connected to the Application and
Controller Node (ACN) via Ethernet. There are two types of EFC units, one for connection of coaxial (copper) field bus, and
another for fibre optics. The connecting unit on the I/O side depends on the type of I/O and field bus media.
In case of Rack I/O the field bus connects to a Process Interface Controller (PIC) card. The PIC provides data communication
and electric isolation between the field bus and the I/O cards. In the redundant field bus solution the I/O Rack is equipped
with
ith two
t PIC units,
it one for
f maini bus
b andd another
th for
f reserve. The
Th coaxiali l field
fi ld bus
b connectst directly
di tl tot the
th PIC,
PIC while
hil the
th
fibre optic bus connects to a Fibre Optical Interface (FBOI) unit at the I/O side. The FBOI is a media converter converting
from fibre optic to coaxial cable. The FBOI connects to the PIC in the I/O Rack.
Embedded I/O or Motor Controller I/O is connected to the Field Bus via a Remote Process Interface Controller ((PICR). ) The
PICR unit can be located in I/O or equipment cabinets. For the fibre optic field bus an FBOI is fitted between the fibre bus
and the PICR. (See next chapter for further information.)

4
VALMARINE
ACN

5
VALMARINE
ACN llamp iindication
di ti
Traffic on
Traffic on Process Bus 2
Process Bus 1

ACN in STBY
Hard Disc
active

Traffic on Field
Bus 1

ACN Runing

High Temp. Traffic on Field


alarm Bus 2
5V DC OK

220V AC OK

6
VALMARINE
ACN Eth
Ethernett C
Cards
d
ETHERNET NETWORK CARDS
Both one
one–channel
channel (D200202) or two–channel
two channel (D200203) network interface cards can be used in a ACN
unit. The interface speed is 10 or 100 Mbit/s. Network cards can be used to connect to a process bus or a
PCS–I/O bus. A ACN RT starts and retrieves its programs from a server in the network, directed by the
start-up program on the network card. The main process bus (PB1, red) is connected to the network card in
card
d slot
l t 1 (CARD1) andd th
the reserve bus
b (PB2
(PB2, green)) tto th
the network
t k card
d iin slot
l t 2 or, if th
there iis only
l one
network card, to the Ethernet connector on the left on the CPU card (ETH0). On a two–channel network
card, the main bus is connected to channel A and the reserve bus to channel B in card slot 1. The location of
the p
process and field buses on one– and two–channel network cards is shownin the table below. ((ETH0 and
ETHx refer to the integrated Ethernet interfaces on the CPU card. Value of x depends on the number of
network interfaces.)

7
VALMARINE
ACN Eth
Ethernett C
Cards
d

Naming and configuration of network connections


The following figures present the supported network interface card combinations and their configuration in
a ACN RT. Figure presents a basic configuration in which a one–channel network interface card is
installed in a ACN RT unit. The network interface card is used in downloading programs from the BU
server.

8
VALMARINE
ACN Eth
Ethernett C
Cards
d
Naming and configuration of network connections
The following figures present the supported network interface card combinations and their configuration in
a ACN RT. Figure 7 presents a basic configuration in which a one–channel network interface card is
installed in a ACN RT unit. The network interface card is used in downloading programs from the BU
server.
server

9
VALMARINE
ACN Eth
Ethernett C
Cards
d
The fig. presents a configuration with 2 PCS I/O buses implemented.

10
VALMARINE
ACN Eth
Ethernett C
Cards
d
The fig
fig. presents a configuration in which 2 PCS I/O buses are carried out by using a two channel network
interface card for the implementation of process buses. A two–channel network interface card is only needed
when 2 PCS I/O buses are required, and only one PCI card slot is available, e.g. 3 x PROFIBUS DP and
redundant PCS I/O bus.

11
VALMARINE
ACN B
Back
k wiring
ii
ACN Cabinet
Redundant 100 Mbit/s Redundant

Control Room Network metsoACN


Redundant
metsoACN
C

3 PCI slots Detachable


for PROFIBUS-DP Personality module
or additional RS-232 - Watchdog cable
EFC
2 RS-232 ports
for LIS connections Redundant 2U
metsoACN EFC
Ethernet connection - Connection to Rack IO
to EFC unit EFC
1 Mbit/s IO Fieldbus
- Redundant
R d d t if neededd d

Additional
Ethernet connection
C2
C2
PIC
PIC

to FF/HSE or
redundant IO Fieldbus
PIC2
PIC2
P

IO Cabinet
12
VALMARINE
ACN R
ACN, Redundant
d d t PCS

Watchdog cable

EFC EFC
ACN Cabinet

PIIC2
PIIC2
PIC2
2
PIC2
2

IO Cabinet
13
VALMARINE
ACN R
ACN, Redundant
d d t PCS
.

14
ACN Update Bus and connection
VALMARINE to switch (redundantACN)

Master Network Switch 1 -

U10 Main Bus (AP01)


to ACN AP01R

Reserve Bus (AP01)


+24V 1
to ACN Main Switch 2,
1 2
-
- 2 3 4
Patch
+24V 3 4 Panel
P1
(Black, 1.5m) 1 Lap-Top, connection
2
(Green, 2m)
3
Computer outlet
(Red 2m)
(Red, (Bl k 1.5m)
(Black, 15 )
4
*
R M
5

6 NOTE:
ACN 7 * Computer(Lap-top) outlets.
8

15
VALMARINE
EFC and
EFCc d EFCf
Supply voltage is connected to connector X2, nominal voltage 24 V DC

16
EFC ( Ethernet to Field Bus
VALMARINE
C
Converter
t )
The EFC units are converter units used in connection with the ACN node,
node through which two PCS
PCS–
I/O buses with different physical transmission paths and protocols are connected together .
The unit EFCc D100644 is used to connect the Ethernet bus and the DNA field bus implemented
with a coaxial cable
.The unit EFCf D200145 is used to connect the Ethernet bus and the DNA field bus implemented
with a fiber cable.
The communication speed of the PCS–I/O bus implemented with Ethernet is 10 Mbit/s (10Base–T).
The communication speed of the coaxial bus and the fiber bus ( DNA field bus) is 1 Mbit/s
Mbit/s.
16 PIC or PICR units can be connected to the outgoing PCS–I/O bus on EFC.

Supply voltage is connected to connector X2, nominal voltage 24 V DC

The EFC units serve as bus and protocol converters on the DNA PCS–I/O bus between the Ethernet bus
and the DNA field bus. EFC forwards the received messages.
Th required
The i d memory circuits
i it ffor running
i th
the program and d saving
i d data
t hhave b
been connected
t d to
t th
the EFC
unit processor.
The processor is connected through its serial ports to the buses connected to the unit.

17
EFC ( Ethernet to Field Bus
VALMARINE
C
Converter
t )

18
EFC ( Ethernet to Field Bus
VALMARINE
C
Converter
t )
EFC is connected to the ACN node through the Ethernet bus
bus. The Ethernet connection is carried out on a twisted
pair cable connected across (10Base–T). Bus speed is 10 Mbit/s.
The twisted pair cable is connected to connector X3. Connector type is 8–pole RJ45, CAT5.

The cable shield is connected to the connector case, which may be connected to the ground plane PE by
setting jumper X4 position to PE (normal connection). If the cable shield is not connected to the ground
plane PE
PE, X4 position is set to NC.
NC X4 is located in the front panel of the EFC case.
case

19
EFC ( Ethernet to Field Bus
VALMARINE
C
Converter
t )
DNA field bus interface
interface, coaxial cable bus
The unit EFCc D100644 is connected to the DNA field bus implemented with a coaxial cable.
The coaxial cable connector is a BNC connector, 75 ohm.

The function of the coaxial cable interface is directed with jumpers X9–SH and X9–TR, located on the front
panel of the EFC case.
p
The metal–body coaxial cable connector X1 is grounded through the EFC case to ground plane PE. The
grounding is secured by setting jumper X9–SH to position PE. Normally,
X9–SH is always in this position.
The coaxial bus terminal resistance is connected by setting jumper X9X9–TR
TR to position CON
CON.
The terminal resistance is always connected with the units at the end of the bus. In position
NC, the terminal resistance is not connected.

20
VALMARINE
FCR llamp indications
i di ti
RX RTS
EFC is recieving EFC is transmitting
data from ANC data to Field Bus

24F
24v TO LOW

Processor

running

CD
EFC is recieving
TX data from Field
COL Bus
EFC is transmitting
data to ANC
Collicion in the
Ethernet Bus

21
PMM ( Personality Module for
VALMARINE
metsoACN
t ACN )

The PMM unit is an additional module installed on metsoACN. Its functions support the following
functions of the metsoACN node:
1. ACN indentification.
2. ACN cabinet power supply monitoring
3. ACN operating state monitoring (RUN, SBY , PB1 , PB2 , FB1 and FB2 located in ACN’s front panel)
4. Internal communication within a redundant PCS.
5 Control of signal lights indicating the operating status
5.

The PMM is communicating with the ACN through a parallel port (EPP = Enhanced Parallel Port) .
The PMM is supplyed
pp y with 5VDC from the ACN through g connector X1.

22
VALMARINE
PMM jjumper setting
tti

The PMM unit has jumpers X3– X3–X8 and


X13 for the selection of functions
functions.

X3–X8 are reserved for future needs.

The jumper X13 may be used to invert the


clock synchronization pulse coming to the
PMM unit.
it If the
th jumper
j is
i in
i position
iti 1 – 2,
2
the pulse is not inverted. In position 2 – 3,
the pulse is inverted.

Location of jumpers

23
VALMARINE
ACN power monitoring
it i
PMM controls the state of the ACN cabinet p power supply
pp y unit. All p
power supply
pp y modules and SPUC battery
y
supply units have a potential–free contact for indicating their state.
The contact is closed, when the unit is in order. The contact data of all power feed units have been connected
in a series and cabled to the PMM units.
There is a relay in the PMM monitoring input
input.

X12-1

X12-2

24
VALMARINE
ANC and
d Fi
Field
ld Bus
B

25
VALMARINE
I/O Field
Fi ld Bus
B
The I/O Field bus connects Embedded I/O (EIO) and Motor Controller I/O (MC) with the Damatic Field bus.
bus It is a shielded
twisted pair bus in a single or redundant configuration. Bus speed is 375 kbps.

The Remote Process Interface Controller (PICR) connects the I/O Field bus with the Damatic Field bus. A PICR controls one
I/O Field bus segment. Each segment can host up to 8 EIO or 16 MC I/O units, or a combination.

26
VALMARINE
ACN EFC and
ACN, d Fi
Field
ld Bus
B

ACN
Field Bus AP01
TP TP U13 - 00
PIC R
Coaxial
EFC1.1 EFC1.2 X1 X2
PE
X4
12345 12

1212
Coax

1 2
X20

1 2 1 2
TP

2 1 2 1
1
AP01 To I/O-Units, Embedded

1
2

2
X12
Coax 1
2 AP01 - To I/O-Cabinet
3
AP01 - To I/O-Cabinet
4
Coax . Field
Fi ld Bus
B AP01
U14 - 06
PIC R
Coaxial
PE
X1 X2 X4
12345 12

1212

1 2
X20
1 2 1 2

TP 2 1 2 1
AP01 - To I/O Units, Embedded
1

1
2

27
VALMARINE
ACN EFC and
ACN, d Coax
C Fi
Fieldbus
ldb

Fieldbus 10 Mbits/s, Ethernet


Twisted pair from metsoACN to EFC

Fieldbus 1 Mbits/s
EFC Coaxial to Process Interface Controllers
D200162
IO Fieldbus 375 kbits/s
metsoACN Cabinet Twisted pair to IO Units

PICR µMC
PIC2
P C2
PIC

IO Cabinet MCC Cabinet

28
VALMARINE
ACN EFC and
ACN, d Fib
Fiber Fieldbus
Fi ldb

Fieldbus 10 Mbits/s, Ethernet


Twisted pair from metsoACN to EFC

Fi ldb 10 Mbit
Fieldbus Mbits/s,
/ Eth
Ethernett
Fiber to Fiber Optic Converters

EFC Fieldbus 1 Mbits/s


Coaxial to Process Interface Controllers
D200163
metsoACN Cabinet IO Fieldbus 375 kbits/s
Twisted pair to IO Units

FBOI PICR µMC


C2
PIC
PIC2
2

IO Cabinet MCC Cabinet


29
VALMARINE
ACN and
d EIO Fieldbus
Fi ldb

metsoACN Cabinet

Fieldbus 10 Mbits/s, Ethernet


Twisted pair from metsoACN to EIO or CIC

D200164

HUB PCR ECR CIC

Damatic Classic

30
VALMARINE
ACN R
ACN, Redundant
d d t Fieldbus
Fi ldb

EFC EFC
metsoACN Cabinet C2
C2
PIC
PIC
PIC2
2
PIC2
2

IO Cabinet
31
VALMARINE ACN and PROFIBUS-
PROFIBUS-DP Fieldbus

metsoACN Cabinet
PROFIBUS-DP max 12 Mbits/s
RS-485 Twisted pair

PROFIBUS-DP max 12 Mbits/s


Optical Line or Fiber Optic Ring
OLM
D200245
D200246

MCC Cabinet MCC Cabinet MCC Cabinet

Field
32
VALMARINE
ACN G
Gateway:LIS
t LIS
Field
1 - RxD(+) 6 - CTS(-)
RS-422 2 - RxD(-) 7 - RTS(+)
Gateway PC Load Calculation

X20
3 - TxD(+) 8 - CTS(+)
4 - TxD(-) 9 - RTS(-)
5 - SR,ref 10

GTW:LIS 1 - RxD(+) 6 - CTS(-)


DSUB 9 PIN RS-422 2 - RxD(-) 7 - RTS(+)
VDR

X211
RJ45 U12 FEMALE 3 - TxD(+) 8 - CTS(+)
NOTE 1 4 - TxD(-) 9 - RTS(-)
1 1 5 - SR,ref 10

2 2 1 - RxD(+) 6 - CTS(-)
2 - RxD(-) 7 - RTS(+)
RS-422
Maintenance

X22
3 - TxD(+) 8 - CTS(+)
4-T TxD(-)
D( ) 9 - RTS(
RTS(-))
3 4 5 - SR,ref 10

4 3 1 - RxD(+) 6 - CTS(-)
2 - RxD(-) 7 - RTS(+)
RS-422
Tank Meas.

X23
3 - TxD(+) 8 - CTS(+)
NOTE 2 4 - TxD(-) 9 - RTS(-)
5 - SR
SR,ref
ref 10
DSUB 9 PIN
NOTE 1
RJ45 FEMALE NOTE 3
U13
1 1
1 - RxD(+) 6 - CTS(-)
RS-422 2 - RxD(-) 7 - RTS(+)
EAS, CAE Valmarine

X24
3 - TxD(+) 8 - CTS(+)
2 2
4 - TxD(-) 9 - RTS(-)
5 - SR
SR,reff 10

3 4
1 - RxD(+) 6 - CTS(-)
RS-422 2 - RxD(-) 7 - RTS(+)
Conning Disp.

X25
4 3 3 - TxD(+) 8 - CTS(+)
4 - TxD(-) 9 - RTS(-)
5 - SR,ref 10
N
Notes :
1. Four channel serial line interface card and cable,
ref. WH equipment list, item U12/U13 1 - RxD(+) 6 - CTS(-)
LENGTH of cable will be 3m 2 - RxD(-) 7 - RTS(+)
RS-422

X26
3 - TxD(+) 8 - CTS(+) Kamewa?
Ref. manufacturer's information for card configuration
4 - TxD(-) 9 - RTS(-)
2. 1-4 are labelling on interface cable. ????(on hold) 5 - SR,ref 10
* Connect 1 to COM3 ( COM7 )
* Connect 2 to COM4 ( COM8 )
*CConnect 3 to COM6 ( COM10 )
1 - RxD(+) 6 - CTS(-)
* Connect 4 to COM5 ( COM9 )
2 - RxD(-) 7 - RTS(+)
In GTW 5, COM 1-2 are reserved motherboard ports, RS-422

X27
3 - TxD(+) 8 - CTS(+) SPARE
while interface card numbering starts with COM 3.
4 - TxD(-) 9 - RTS(-)
3. Size of terminal is wxlxh=45x77x58.5mm, for type ref. 5 - SR,ref 10
WH equipment list, item X20-X27
33
VALMARINE

Connection to The System


&
I/O Basic Module

Ê Different Field Interfaces


Ê C
Connection
ti T To the
th System
S t
Ê I/O Basic Module
VALMARINE Different Field Interfaces
Process Control
max. 16 PIC (R) per FBC
max. 16 PCR / ECR per FBC
max. 16 FFIC per SBC

Field Bus 1 Mbits/s


(single / redundant)
fiber 2 km, coax. 4 km

Field Bus 10 Mbits/s


Ethernet
thin 185 m /
twisted pair 100 m /
fiber 2 km

I/O Field Bus


(single / redundant)
375 kBit/s
twisted pair 250 m

Intelligent I/O Field Bus


750 kBit/s
twisted pair 20 m

Foundation
F d i I/O Field
Fi ld Bus
B
twisted pair 1900 m

2
IO-Connection to
IO-
VALMARINE
th system
the t VME

3
IO-Connection to
IO-
VALMARINE
th system
the t DNA

4
VALMARINE
I/O Basic
B i Module
M d l
Thee process
p ocess co
control
o sstation's
o s I/O
/O sub
subrack
c co
consists
s s s oof thee following
o ow g u units:
s:

•IPU (I/O Power Unit)


The I/O power unit receives 28...33 VDC from the power supply unit (FPU or FPUS) at the lower
partt off the
th cabinet.
bi t
•PIC (Process Interface Controller)
The Process Interface Controller connects the process control station's Field Bus Controller (FBC) to
the p
process I/O units. PIC itself does not handle data. Instead, it communicates the data through
g the
field bus to the process control station's FBC, and from FBC to I/O units.
•In addition the I/O subrack is equipped with the necessary I/O units, which are presented in the
following chapters.

Mimic of an I/O Basic Module with cards: BasicModule.jpg


Mimic of an I/O Cabinet with several Basic Modules and cards: IOCabinet.jpg
jpg

5
Different
VALMARINE
I/O Basic
B i Modules
M d l

Single PCS
Si l Field
Single Fi ld Bus
B

Single PCS
Red. Field Bus
OR
Red. PCS

Same as above but


with red. PWR
supply
l

6
VALMARINE
Change
Ch off IO-
IO-Cards
C d

The IO-cards (and PIC) cards can be changed without powering


off the operation power from the IPU
IPU.

Note that the PIC card has EPROM


EPROM.

7
Detailed Index Chapter 4 Page 1 of 6

I/O card, Terminal boards


and
sensors connection

I/O Card Embeddid I/O Card  


Motor Control  

Connection
Type Card Front 1 Card Front 2
Principle
General
Process Interface gen
Controller

AOU1
Analogue Out 1
channels.
aou1.gif aou1
0/4-20mA
0/1-5V
0/10-50mA

AOU1U ou1u
AOU4
Analogue Out 4
channels. aou4.gif aou4
0/4-20mA
0/1-5V
0/10-50mA

AIU8
Analogue In 8 channels.
0/4-20mA aiu8.gif aiu8
0/1-5V
0/10-50mA

AIU4l
Analogue In 4 galvanic

file://\\apssdata1\tecnico\80 Training Course\10 Valmarine\Valmarine\Course Docum... 13/04/2011


Detailed Index Chapter 4 Page 2 of 6

isolated channels.
0/4-20mA
0/1-5V
aiu4.gif aiu4
0/10-50mA

AIH8
Analogue In with HART
communication.
4-20mA

TIU6 
4w PT100 sensors with tiu6.gif tiu6
break monitoring.

TIU61
3w PT100 sensors with tiu61.gif tiu61l.gif
break monitoring.

TCU41
Thermo element sensors
of tcu41.gif tcu4
Type J/K/L. 4 Galvanic
Isolated channels.

TCU42
Thermo element
sensors of
Type S. 4 Galvanic
Isolated channels.

BIU4
Binary Input 4 Channels.
With antivalence and biu4.gif biu4
break monitoring. Current
limited and monitored
field supply/channel.

BIU8 
Self-powered relay input biu8.gif biu8
with simulatioin switches
(28V)

BIU82
Self-powered short circuit biu82.gif biu82
protected, opto isolated,
PNP/NPN input (28V).

BIU84
Self-powered short
circuit protected, biu84.gif
optoisolated, PNP/NPN
input (28V). Also with
simulation switches.

BIU83
Totally biu83.gif biu83
floating,optoisolated input
(Umax=40V).

BIU85

file://\\apssdata1\tecnico\80 Training Course\10 Valmarine\Valmarine\Course Docum... 13/04/2011


Detailed Index Chapter 4 Page 3 of 6

Totally
floating,optoisolated
biu85.gif
input (Umax=40V). Also
with simulation switches.

BIU8N
NAMUR(EN50227). biu8N.gif biu8n
Proximity switch input
with simulator swithces.

BIC12
PNP Inputs with break
monitoring, IEC61131-2
decision levels. Current
limited and monitored
field supply/channel.

BOU8
Self-powered, short circuit bou8.gif bou8
protected, relay output
with simulation switches.

BOU8P bou8p
8T,500mA/24VDC

BOU82
Totally floating change- bou82.gif bou82
over contact with
simulation switches.

BOU84/BOU85 bou84.gif
Output units from fast
extension bus, totally
floating change-over relay bou85.gif
or solid-solid state switch.

BOU83
Totally floating solid-state
contact for high switching bou83.gif bou83
rate and with simulation
switches.

FIU1
Frequency Input
0-10kHz frequency input
OR 0-200kHz pulse input. fiu1.gif fiu1
Indication of rotation
direction with quadrature
input.

PLU1
Independent controls,
min. 5ms cycle.

PLU2
Independent controls,
min. 5ms cycle.

PLU3

file://\\apssdata1\tecnico\80 Training Course\10 Valmarine\Valmarine\Course Docum... 13/04/2011


Detailed Index Chapter 4 Page 4 of 6

Independent controls,
min. 5ms cycle.

ACU
Independent controls,
min. 20ms cycle.
Inputs:
0/4 - 20mA
0/1 - 5V
0/2 - 10V

EIU1(Exi Inp. Unit)


Intrinsically Safe Input
w/ 1 channel.

AIE2(Ana. Input Exi)


Intrinsically Safe Input
w/ 2 channels.

EOU1(Exi Output
Unit)
Intrinsically Safe
Output w/ 1 channel.

AOE2(Ana. Output
Exi)
Intrinsically Safe
Output w/ 2 channels.

BIE4 (Bin.Input
Exi)
Instinsically Safe
Binary Input w/ 4
channels.

Terminal boards & connections


Connection
Type TB Layout
Principle TB

file://\\apssdata1\tecnico\80 Training Course\10 Valmarine\Valmarine\Course Docum... 13/04/2011


Detailed Index Chapter 4 Page 5 of 6

XDAOU1TB (AOU1) T10506a1


XDATB8T (AUO4) T10507a2
XDATB8T (AIU4) T10508a2
XDATB8T (AIU8) T10500A1
XDATB6T (TIU6)  T10512a1
XDATB6T (TIU61) T10502a1
XDATB8T (TCU41) T10501a1
XDATB8T (BIU4) T10504a1
XDATB8T (BIU8) T10503a1
XDATB8T (BIU82/84) T10516a1
XDATB8T (BIU83/85) T10517a1
XDATB8T (BIU8N) T10518a1
RXD 8-2 (BOU8) T10505a1
XDATB8T (BOU82/84) T10514a1
XDATB8T (BOU83/85) T10514a1
XDP1TB (FIU1) T10509a1 T10609a1
XDP1TB-2 (FIU1) T10511a1 T10615a1

file://\\apssdata1\tecnico\80 Training Course\10 Valmarine\Valmarine\Course Docum... 13/04/2011


Detailed Index Chapter 4 Page 1 of 3

Embedded I/O Cards,


Terminal boards
and
sensors connection

Embedded I/O Units


Connection
Type Card Front 1 Card Front 2
Principle
General
gen.gif    
Embedded fiels bus

file://\\apssdata1\tecnico\80 Training Course\10 Valmarine\Valmarine\Course Docum... 13/04/2011


Detailed Index Chapter 4 Page 2 of 3

CRR41
crr41.gif    
Basic Module

AOR4
Analogue Output 4
channels aor4c
aor4.gif  
0/4-20mA     aor4v
0/1-5V
0-10V

AIR8 air8c.gif
Analogue input 8
     air8h.gif (HART
channels. air8.gif  
comunic.)
0/4-20mA
     air8v.gif
0/1-5V

BIR82
Binary input 8 channels
Two-wire aproximity
bir82.gif   bir82.gif
switches or
three-wire NPN,PNP
type.

BIR83
Binary input 8 channels. bir83.gif   bir83.gif
Measuring AC/DC
voltage up to max.40V

BOR82 
8 Binary output bor82.gif   bor82.gif
channels with NO/NC
contacts .

BOR83 
8 Binary output bor83.gif   bor83.gif
channels with only 2
pole contact.

TIR61,62
3w PT100 sensors with
break monitoring tir61.gif   tir61.gif
4w PT100 sensors with
break monitoring.

       
       
       
       

file://\\apssdata1\tecnico\80 Training Course\10 Valmarine\Valmarine\Course Docum... 13/04/2011


VALMARINE

Explanation of The
TerminalBoard Number

Embedded TB Number
VALMARINE
C d Slot
Card Sl t Numbering
N b i

Starts at slot 05 with


g IPU and ends in
single
20 with a non red.
fieldbus

Starts at slot 07 with


double IPU and ends
in19 with fieldbus

2
VALMARINE
Rack/PIC
R k/PIC NNumber
b
IO Cab
IO-C b.01
01 IO Cab
IO-C b.02
02

PIC 00 PIC 04

PIC 01 PIC 05

PIC 02 PIC 06

PIC 03 PIC 07

3
Process Station
VALMARINE
Number
N b

AP01 AP02
PIC00,
PIC00
PIC00, AP02
AP01
PIC01,,
PIC01, AP02
AP01
PIC03,
PIC02, AP01
AP01
PIC04,
PIC02,
PIC02 AP01
AP02
4
TerminalBoard
VALMARINE
Number
N b

020709

Process Station: AP02

PIC Number: 07

Card Slot Number: 09

5
How to find the
VALMARINE
I/O Location
L ti

From Instrument list (Terminalboard) list you will find the Terminalboard no. for
g
the tag:

I/O Cabinet: T3S.1

TerminalBoard Number: 020709


6
VALMARINE
H
How tto fi
find
d the
th I/O Location
L ti
Cabinet: T3S.1

Labelled on
swingframe and on
frontdoor

7
VALMARINE
H
How tto fi
find
d the
th I/O Location
L ti
Cabinet: T3S.1
Swingframe
g T3S.1

I/O Card 09

I/O-Rack 02/PIC 07

Process Station
S 2// AP02

The Process Station no. is marked


at the left of the Rack Label List
and the PIC no on the right side.
8
Temporary Demo Version of EscapeE Copyright RedTitan 2002
VALMARINE AS TERMINAL BOARD LIST DATE: 17.01.2000 PAGE: 553

CUSTOMER: COSTA/CCL BUILDING: KMYH NB498 DEPARTMENT: HARDWARE

TERMINAL BOARD NO.: 050406 TERMINAL BOARD TYPE: XDATB6T CARD TYPE: TIU6
CABINET: B3S.1 STATION: AP05 FBC: 2 PIC: 4 CARD: 6

CORE TER. PIN CH. DEVICE TAG NAME SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK
NO. NO. NAME NO. TAG TYPE REMARK

1 IM 0 9122T201.1 9122T201 MG2 MOTOR WIND U 4W PT100 4w, MEAS., ALARM


3 + TIAH
4 -
2 COMMON

5 IM 1 9122T202.1 9122T202 MG2 MOTOR WIND V 4W PT100 4w, MEAS., ALARM


7 + TIAH
8 -
6 COMMON

9 IM 2 9122T203.1 9122T203 MG2 MOTOR WIND W 4W PT100 4w, MEAS., ALARM


11 + TIAH
12 -
10 COMMON

13 IM 3 9122T204.1 9122T204 MG2 GENER WIND U 4W PT100 4w, MEAS., ALARM


15 + TIAH
16 -
14 COMMON

17 IM 4 9122T205.1 9122T205 MG2 GENER WIND V 4W PT100 4w, MEAS., ALARM


19 + TIAH
20 -
18 COMMON

21 IM 5 9122T206.1 9122T206 MG2 GENER WIND W 4W PT100 4w, MEAS., ALARM


23 + TIAH
24 -
22 COMMON
VALMARINE AS TERMINAL BOARD LIST DATE: 17.01.2000 PAGE: 554

Temporary
CUSTOMER:Demo Version of EscapeE Copyright RedTitan
COSTA/CCL 2002
BUILDING: KMYH NB498 DEPARTMENT: HARDWARE

TERMINAL BOARD NO.: 050407 TERMINAL BOARD TYPE: XDATB8T CARD TYPE: BIU8
CABINET: B3S.1 STATION: AP05 FBC: 2 PIC: 4 CARD: 7

CORE TER. PIN CH. DEVICE TAG NAME SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK
NO. NO. NAME NO. TAG TYPE REMARK

1 -INPUT 0 6611/003.1 6611/003 SEA WATER PUMP3 BI N/O RUNNING LOW FEEDBA
2 COMMON XI
3

4 -INPUT 1 6611/003.2 6611/003 SEA WATER PUMP3 BI N/O RUNNING HIGH FEEDB
5 COMMON XI
6

7 -INPUT 2 6611/003.6 6611/003 SEA WATER PUMP3 BI N/C REMOTE/LOCAL SWITC


8 COMMON XI
9

10 -INPUT 3 6611/012.1 6611/012 GEN SERV SW P2 BI N/O RUNNING LOW FEEDBA


11 COMMON XI
12

13 -INPUT 4 6611/012.2 6611/012 GEN SERV SW P2 BI N/O RUNNING HIGH FEEDB


14 COMMON XI
15

16 -INPUT 5 6611/012.6 6611/012 GEN SERV SW P2 BI N/C REMOTE/LOCAL SWITC


17 COMMON XI
18

19 -INPUT 6 5311/004.1 5311/004 AC REHEAT CIRC P4 BI N/O RUNNING FEEDBACK


20 COMMON XO
21

22 -INPUT 7 5311/004.4 5311/004 AC REHEAT CIRC P4 BI N/C REMOTE/LOCAL SWITC


23 COMMON XO
24
Temporary Demo Version of EscapeE Copyright RedTitan 2002
VALMARINE AS TERMINAL BOARD LIST DATE: 17.01.2000 PAGE: 555

CUSTOMER: COSTA/CCL BUILDING: KMYH NB498 DEPARTMENT: HARDWARE

TERMINAL BOARD NO.: 050408 TERMINAL BOARD TYPE: XDATB8T CARD TYPE: BOU8(P)
CABINET: B3S.1 STATION: AP05 FBC: 2 PIC: 4 CARD: 8

CORE TER. PIN CH. DEVICE TAG NAME SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK
NO. NO. NAME NO. TAG TYPE REMARK

2 COMMON 0 6611/003.3 6611/003 SEA WATER PUMP3 BO N/O START LOW COMMAND
3 NC XI
4 NO

5 COMMON 1 6611/003.4 6611/003 SEA WATER PUMP3 BO N/O START HIGH COMMAN
6 NC XI
7 NO

8 COMMON 2 6611/003.5 6611/003 SEA WATER PUMP3 BO N/O STOP COMMAND


9 NC XI
10 NO

11 COMMON 3 6611/012.3 6611/012 GEN SERV SW P2 BO N/O START LOW COMMAND


12 NC XI
13 NO

14 COMMON 4 6611/012.4 6611/012 GEN SERV SW P2 BO N/O START HIGH COMMAN


15 NC XI
16 NO

17 COMMON 5 6611/012.5 6611/012 GEN SERV SW P2 BO N/O STOP COMMAND


18 NC XI
19 NO

20 COMMON 6 5311/004.2 5311/004 AC REHEAT CIRC P4 BO N/O START COMMAND


21 NC XO
22 NO

23 COMMON 7 5311/004.3 5311/004 AC REHEAT CIRC P4 BO N/O STOP COMMAND


24 NC XO
25 NO
VALMARINE AS TERMINAL BOARD LIST DATE: 17.01.2000 PAGE: 556

CUSTOMER:
Temporary COSTA/CCL
Demo Version BUILDING:
of EscapeE Copyright RedTitan 2002 KMYH NB498 DEPARTMENT: HARDWARE

TERMINAL BOARD NO.: 050409 TERMINAL BOARD TYPE: XDATB8T CARD TYPE: BIU8
CABINET: B3S.1 STATION: AP05 FBC: 2 PIC: 4 CARD: 9

CORE TER. PIN CH. DEVICE TAG NAME SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK
NO. NO. NAME NO. TAG TYPE REMARK

1 -INPUT 0 6621/003.1 6621/003 MAIN LT PUMP3 BI N/O RUNNING FEEDBACK


2 COMMON XI
3

4 -INPUT 1 6621/003.4 6621/003 MAIN LT PUMP3 BI N/C REMOTE/LOCAL SWITC


5 COMMON XI
6

7 -INPUT 2 6621/012.1 6621/012 GEN LT SERVICE P2 BI N/O RUNNING FEEDBACK


8 COMMON XI
9

10 -INPUT 3 6621/012.4 6621/012 GEN LT SERVICE P2 BI N/C REMOTE/LOCAL SWITC


11 COMMON XI
12

13 -INPUT 4 6631/012.1 6631/012 DE4-6 PREHEAT PUMP BI N/O RUNNING FEEDBACK


14 COMMON XI
15

16 -INPUT 5 6631/012.4 6631/012 DE4-6 PREHEAT PUMP BI N/C REMOTE/LOCAL SWITC


17 COMMON XI
18

19 -INPUT 6 7321/002.1 7321/002 BALLAST P2 BI N/O RUNNING FEEDBACK


20 COMMON XO
21

22 -INPUT 7 7321/002.4 7321/002 BALLAST P2 BI N/C REMOTE/LOCAL SWITC


23 COMMON XO
24
VALMARINE AS TERMINAL BOARD LIST DATE: 17.01.2000 PAGE: 557
Temporary Demo Version of EscapeE Copyright RedTitan 2002
CUSTOMER: COSTA/CCL BUILDING: KMYH NB498 DEPARTMENT: HARDWARE

TERMINAL BOARD NO.: 050410 TERMINAL BOARD TYPE: XDATB8T CARD TYPE: BOU8(P)
CABINET: B3S.1 STATION: AP05 FBC: 2 PIC: 4 CARD: 10

CORE TER. PIN CH. DEVICE TAG NAME SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK
NO. NO. NAME NO. TAG TYPE REMARK

2 COMMON 0 6621/003.2 6621/003 MAIN LT PUMP3 BO N/O START COMMAND


3 NC XI
4 NO

5 COMMON 1 6621/003.3 6621/003 MAIN LT PUMP3 BO N/O STOP COMMAND


6 NC XI
7 NO

8 COMMON 2 6621/012.2 6621/012 GEN LT SERVICE P2 BO N/O START COMMAND


9 NC XI
10 NO

11 COMMON 3 6621/012.3 6621/012 GEN LT SERVICE P2 BO N/O STOP COMMAND


12 NC XI
13 NO

14 COMMON 4 6631/012.2 6631/012 DE4-6 PREHEAT PUMP BO N/O START COMMAND


15 NC XI
16 NO

17 COMMON 5 6631/012.3 6631/012 DE4-6 PREHEAT PUMP BO N/O STOP COMMAND


18 NC XI
19 NO

20 COMMON 6 7321/002.2 7321/002 BALLAST P2 BO N/O START COMMAND


21 NC XO
22 NO

23 COMMON 7 7321/002.3 7321/002 BALLAST P2 BO N/O STOP COMMAND


24 NC XO
25 NO
Temporary Demo Version of EscapeE Copyright RedTitan 2002
VALMARINE AS TERMINAL BOARD LIST DATE: 17.01.2000 PAGE: 558

CUSTOMER: COSTA/CCL BUILDING: KMYH NB498 DEPARTMENT: HARDWARE

TERMINAL BOARD NO.: 050411 TERMINAL BOARD TYPE: XDATB8T CARD TYPE: BIU8
CABINET: B3S.1 STATION: AP05 FBC: 2 PIC: 4 CARD: 11

CORE TER. PIN CH. DEVICE TAG NAME SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK
NO. NO. NAME NO. TAG TYPE REMARK

1 -INPUT 0 6511/010.1 6511/010 DE4 PRELUB PUMP BI N/O RUNNING FEEDBACK


2 COMMON XO
3

4 -INPUT 1 6511/010.4 6511/010 DE4 PRELUB PUMP BI N/C REMOTE/LOCAL SWITC


5 COMMON XO
6

7 -INPUT 2 6511/011.1 6511/011 DE5 PRELUB PUMP BI N/O RUNNING FEEDBACK


8 COMMON XO
9

10 -INPUT 3 6511/011.4 6511/011 DE5 PRELUB PUMP BI N/C REMOTE/LOCAL SWITC


11 COMMON XO
12

13 -INPUT 4 6511/012.1 6511/012 DE6 PRELUB PUMP BI N/O RUNNING FEEDBACK


14 COMMON XO
15

16 -INPUT 5 6511/012.4 6511/012 DE6 PRELUB PUMP BI N/C REMOTE/LOCAL SWITC


17 COMMON XO
18

19 -INPUT 6 6711/005.1 6711/005 BOILER FWD FEED P1 BI N/O RUNNING FEEDBACK


20 COMMON XO
21

22 -INPUT 7 6711/005.4 6711/005 BOILER FWD FEED P1 BI N/C REMOTE/LOCAL SWITC


23 COMMON XO
24
VALMARINE AS TERMINAL BOARD LIST DATE: 17.01.2000 PAGE: 559
Temporary Demo Version of EscapeE Copyright RedTitan 2002
CUSTOMER: COSTA/CCL BUILDING: KMYH NB498 DEPARTMENT: HARDWARE

TERMINAL BOARD NO.: 050412 TERMINAL BOARD TYPE: XDATB8T CARD TYPE: BOU8(P)
CABINET: B3S.1 STATION: AP05 FBC: 2 PIC: 4 CARD: 12

CORE TER. PIN CH. DEVICE TAG NAME SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK
NO. NO. NAME NO. TAG TYPE REMARK

2 COMMON 0 6511/010.2 6511/010 DE4 PRELUB PUMP BO N/O START COMMAND


3 NC XO
4 NO

5 COMMON 1 6511/010.3 6511/010 DE4 PRELUB PUMP BO N/O STOP COMMAND


6 NC XO
7 NO

8 COMMON 2 6511/011.2 6511/011 DE5 PRELUB PUMP BO N/O START COMMAND


9 NC XO
10 NO

11 COMMON 3 6511/011.3 6511/011 DE5 PRELUB PUMP BO N/O STOP COMMAND


12 NC XO
13 NO

14 COMMON 4 6511/012.2 6511/012 DE6 PRELUB PUMP BO N/O START COMMAND


15 NC XO
16 NO

17 COMMON 5 6511/012.3 6511/012 DE6 PRELUB PUMP BO N/O STOP COMMAND


18 NC XO
19 NO

20 COMMON 6 6711/005.2 6711/005 BOILER FWD FEED P1 BO N/O START COMMAND


21 NC XO
22 NO

23 COMMON 7 6711/005.3 6711/005 BOILER FWD FEED P1 BO N/O STOP COMMAND


24 NC XO
25 NO
VALMARINE AS TERMINAL BOARD LIST DATE: 17.01.2000 PAGE: 560

Temporary Demo COSTA/CCL


CUSTOMER: Version of EscapeE Copyright RedTitan 2002
BUILDING: KMYH NB498 DEPARTMENT: HARDWARE

TERMINAL BOARD NO.: 050413 TERMINAL BOARD TYPE: XDATB8T CARD TYPE: BIU8
CABINET: B3S.1 STATION: AP05 FBC: 2 PIC: 4 CARD: 13

CORE TER. PIN CH. DEVICE TAG NAME SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK
NO. NO. NAME NO. TAG TYPE REMARK

1 -INPUT 0 9122X201.1 9122X201 MG2 WATER LEAKAGE BI N/C ALARM


2 COMMON XA
3

4 -INPUT 1 9121T125.1 9121T125 T12 LIQUID TEMP HIGH BI N/C ALARM


5 COMMON TAH
6

7 -INPUT 2 9121X121.1 9121X121 T12 GAS ALARM BI N/C ALARM


8 COMMON XA
9

10 -INPUT 3 9121L121.1 9121L121 T12 LIQUID LEVEL MIN BI N/O ALARM


11 COMMON LAL
12

13 -INPUT 4 9121L122.1 9121L122 T12 LIQUID LEVEL MAX BI N/O ALARM


14 COMMON LAH
15

16 -INPUT 5 8414X003.1 8414X003 LIFEBOAT S EARTH F BI N/C ALARM


17 COMMON XA
18

19 -INPUT 6 8414X004.1 8414X004 LIFEBOAT P EARTH F BI N/C ALARM


20 COMMON XA
21

22 -INPUT 7 9121P121.1 9121P121 T12 LIQUID STBY PR BI N/O SWITCH


23 COMMON PDSL
24
VALMARINE AS TERMINAL BOARD LIST DATE: 17.01.2000 PAGE: 561
Temporary Demo Version of EscapeE Copyright RedTitan 2002
CUSTOMER: COSTA/CCL BUILDING: KMYH NB498 DEPARTMENT: HARDWARE

TERMINAL BOARD NO.: 050414 TERMINAL BOARD TYPE: XDATB8T CARD TYPE: BIU8
CABINET: B3S.1 STATION: AP05 FBC: 2 PIC: 4 CARD: 14

CORE TER. PIN CH. DEVICE TAG NAME SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK
NO. NO. NAME NO. TAG TYPE REMARK

1 -INPUT 0 6222L201.1 6222L201 CC2 T1 LIQUID LEVEL BI N/O ALARM


2 COMMON LAL
3

4 -INPUT 1 6222L202.1 6222L202 CC2 T1 LIQUID LEVEL BI N/O ALARM


5 COMMON LAH
6

7 -INPUT 2 6222T213.1 6222T213 CC2 T1 LIQUID TEMP H BI N/O ALARM


8 COMMON TAH
9

10 -INPUT 3 9121L123.1 9121L123 T12 WATER LEAKAGE BI N/C ALARM


11 COMMON LAH
12

13 -INPUT 4 6222L203.1 6222L203 CC2 T2 LIQUID LEVEL BI N/O ALARM


14 COMMON LAL
15

16 -INPUT 5 6222L204.1 6222L204 CC2 T2 LIQUID LEVEL BI N/O ALARM


17 COMMON LAH
18

19 -INPUT 6 6222T220.1 6222T220 CC2 T2 LIQUID TEMP H BI N/O ALARM


20 COMMON TAH
21

22 -INPUT 7 9121X204.1 9121X204 TRAFO T151 TEMP ALAR BI N/C ALARM


23 COMMON XA
24
Temporary Demo Version of EscapeE Copyright RedTitan 2002
VALMARINE AS TERMINAL BOARD LIST DATE: 17.01.2000 PAGE: 562

CUSTOMER: COSTA/CCL BUILDING: KMYH NB498 DEPARTMENT: HARDWARE

TERMINAL BOARD NO.: 050415 TERMINAL BOARD TYPE: XDATB8T CARD TYPE: BIU8
CABINET: B3S.1 STATION: AP05 FBC: 2 PIC: 4 CARD: 15

CORE TER. PIN CH. DEVICE TAG NAME SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK
NO. NO. NAME NO. TAG TYPE REMARK

1 -INPUT 0 6624L021.1 6624L021 LT EXP TANK LEVEL BI N/C ALARM


2 COMMON LAL
3

4 -INPUT 1 6634L002.1 6634L002 DE4-6 HT EXP TANK BI N/C ALARM


5 COMMON LAL
6

7 -INPUT 2 6634L004.1 6634L004 DE4-6 HT EXP TANK BI N/C ALARM


8 COMMON LAH
9

10 -INPUT 3 6624L701.1 6624L701 FW COOL EXP TANK BI N/C ALARM


11 COMMON LAL
12

13 -INPUT 4 6624L702.1 6624L702 ST.AIR COMP2 EXP TK BI N/C ALARM


14 COMMON LAL
15

16 -INPUT 5 6222X234.1 6222X234 CC2/T1 COOLER LEAK BI N/C ALARM


17 COMMON XA
18

19 -INPUT 6 6222X235.1 6222X235 CC2/T2 COOLER LEAK BI N/C ALARM


20 COMMON XA
21

22 -INPUT 7 9121X210.1 9121X210 TRAFO T241 TEMP ALAR BI N/C ALARM


23 COMMON XA
24
VALMARINE AS INSTRUMENTATION LIST DATE : 07.09.2000 Page : 270
CUSTOMER : CCL BUILDING : KMYH NB499 DEPARTMENT : HARDWARE
Temporary Demo Version of EscapeE Copyright RedTitan 2002
6611/001_L SEA WATER PUMP1 DISPLAY: TO MIMIC FB_TYPE: BOLR2 FUNCTION:
CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 0 SUP.GRP: DELAY: 0 s AREA_ID: T2P.1 INS.CODE: XO STATION: AP03 EXE: 1900ms REV: 999A

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 6611/001_L.1 BOU8-2 BO N/O OUTPUT MIMIC T2P.1 10. 5. 0 031005
2 6611/001_L.2 BOU8-2 BO N/O OUTPUT MIMIC T2P.1 10. 5. 5 031005

6611/002 SEA WATER PUMP2 DISPLAY: 1.47 FB_TYPE: MTWRCW FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 3 SUP.GRP: DELAY: 0 s AREA_ID: T2S.2 INS.CODE: XO STATION: AP02 EXE: 1600ms REV: 999

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 6611/002.1 BIU8 BI N/O RUNNING LOW FEEDBA B2S.1 1. 5. 0 020105
2 6611/002.2 BIU8 BI N/O RUNNING HIGH FEEDB B2S.1 1. 5. 1 020105
3 6611/002.3 BOU8(P) BO N/O START LOW COMMAND B2S.1 1. 6. 0 020106
4 6611/002.4 BOU8(P) BO N/O START HIGH COMMAN B2S.1 1. 6. 1 020106
5 6611/002.5 BOU8(P) BO N/O STOP COMMAND B2S.1 1. 6. 2 020106
6 6611/002.6 BIU8 BI N/C REMOTE/LOCAL SWITC B2S.1 1. 5. 2 020105

6611/002_L SEA WATER PUMP2 DISPLAY: TO MIMIC FB_TYPE: BOLR2 FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 0 SUP.GRP: DELAY: 0 s AREA_ID: T2P.1 INS.CODE: XO STATION: AP03 EXE: 1900ms REV: 999A

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 6611/002_L.1 BOU8-2 BO N/O OUTPUT MIMIC T2P.1 10. 5. 1 031005
2 6611/002_L.2 BOU8-2 BO N/O OUTPUT MIMIC T2P.1 10. 6. 6 031006

6611/003 SEA WATER PUMP3 DISPLAY: 1.48 FB_TYPE: MTWRCW FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 3 SUP.GRP: DELAY: 0 s AREA_ID: B3S.1 INS.CODE: XI STATION: AP05 EXE: 1600ms REV: 999

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 6611/003.1 BIU8 BI N/O RUNNING LOW FEEDBA B3S.1 4. 7. 0 050407
2 6611/003.2 BIU8 BI N/O RUNNING HIGH FEEDB B3S.1 4. 7. 1 050407
3 6611/003.3 BOU8(P) BO N/O START LOW COMMAND B3S.1 4. 8. 0 050408
4 6611/003.4 BOU8(P) BO N/O START HIGH COMMAN B3S.1 4. 8. 1 050408
5 6611/003.5 BOU8(P) BO N/O STOP COMMAND B3S.1 4. 8. 2 050408
6 6611/003.6 BIU8 BI N/C REMOTE/LOCAL SWITC B3S.1 4. 7. 2 050407

6611/003_L SEA WATER PUMP3 DISPLAY: TO MIMIC FB_TYPE: BOLR2 FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 0 SUP.GRP: DELAY: s AREA_ID: T2P.2 INS.CODE: XO STATION: AP03 EXE: 1900ms REV: NEW12

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 6611/003_L.1 BOU8-2 BO N/O OUTPUT MIMIC T2P.2 6. 8. 3 030608
2 6611/003_L.2 BOU8-2 BO N/O OUTPUT MIMIC T2P.2 6. 7. 6 030607
VALMARINE AS INSTRUMENTATION LIST DATE : 07.09.2000 Page : 271
Temporary Demo
CUSTOMER : Version
CCL of EscapeE Copyright RedTitan 2002 BUILDING : KMYH NB499 DEPARTMENT : HARDWARE

6611/004 SEA WATER PUMP4 DISPLAY: 1.48 FB_TYPE: MTWRCW FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 3 SUP.GRP: DELAY: 0 s AREA_ID: B3S.1 INS.CODE: XI STATION: AP05 EXE: 1600ms REV: 999

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 6611/004.1 BIU8 BI N/O RUNNING LOW FEEDBA B3S.1 5. 5. 0 050505
2 6611/004.2 BIU8 BI N/O RUNNING HIGH FEEDB B3S.1 5. 5. 1 050505
3 6611/004.3 BOU8(P) BO N/O START LOW COMMAND B3S.1 5. 6. 0 050506
4 6611/004.4 BOU8(P) BO N/O START HIGH COMMAN B3S.1 5. 6. 1 050506
5 6611/004.5 BOU8(P) BO N/O STOP COMMAND B3S.1 5. 6. 2 050506
6 6611/004.6 BIU8 BI N/C REMOTE/LOCAL SWITC B3S.1 5. 5. 2 050505

6611/004_L SEA WATER PUMP4 DISPLAY: TO MIMIC FB_TYPE: BOLR2 FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 0 SUP.GRP: DELAY: s AREA_ID: T2P.2 INS.CODE: XO STATION: AP03 EXE: 1900ms REV: NEW12

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 6611/004_L.1 BOU8-2 BO N/O OUTPUT MIMIC T2P.2 6. 8. 4 030608
2 6611/004_L.2 BOU8-2 BO N/O OUTPUT MIMIC T2P.2 6. 7. 7 030607

6611/005 SEA WATER DUMP COND DISPLAY: 1.47 FB_TYPE: MSARLS FUNCTION:
CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 3 SUP.GRP: DELAY: 0 s AREA_ID: T3S.1 INS.CODE: XI STATION: AP02 EXE: 1600ms REV: 999

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 6611/005.1 BIU8 BI N/O RUNNING FEEDBACK T3S.1 7. 7. 0 020707
2 6611/005.2 BOU8(P) BO N/O START COMMAND T3S.1 7. 8. 0 020708
3 6611/005.3 BOU8(P) BO N/O STOP COMMAND T3S.1 7. 8. 1 020708
4 6611/005.4 BIU8 BI N/C REMOTE/LOCAL SWITC T3S.1 7. 7. 1 020707

6611/006 SEA WATER DUMP COND DISPLAY: 1.48 FB_TYPE: MSARLS FUNCTION:
CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 3 SUP.GRP: DELAY: 0 s AREA_ID: T4S.1 INS.CODE: XI STATION: AP05 EXE: 1600ms REV: 999

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 6611/006.1 BIU8 BI N/O RUNNING FEEDBACK T4S.1 8.13. 0 050813
2 6611/006.2 BOU8(P) BO N/O START COMMAND T4S.1 8.15. 0 050815
3 6611/006.3 BOU8(P) BO N/O STOP COMMAND T4S.1 8.15. 1 050815
4 6611/006.4 BIU8 BI N/C REMOTE/LOCAL SWITC T4S.1 8.13. 1 050813

6611/011 GEN SERV SW P1 DISPLAY: 1.48 FB_TYPE: MTWRCW FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 3 SUP.GRP: DELAY: 0 s AREA_ID: B2S.1 INS.CODE: XI STATION: AP02 EXE: 1600ms REV: 999

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 6611/011.1 BIU8 BI N/O RUNNING LOW FEEDBA B2S.1 0. 8. 3 020008
2 6611/011.2 BIU8 BI N/O RUNNING HIGH FEEDB B2S.1 0. 8. 4 020008
3 6611/011.3 BOU8(P) BO N/O START LOW COMMAND B2S.1 0. 9. 3 020009
4 6611/011.4 BOU8(P) BO N/O START HIGH COMMAN B2S.1 0. 9. 4 020009
5 6611/011.5 BOU8(P) BO N/O STOP COMMAND B2S.1 0. 9. 5 020009
VALMARINE AS Version of EscapeE Copyright RedTitan 2002
Temporary Demo INSTRUMENTATION LIST DATE : 07.09.2000 Page : 272
CUSTOMER : CCL BUILDING : KMYH NB499 DEPARTMENT : HARDWARE

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
6 6611/011.6 BIU8 BI N/C REMOTE/LOCAL SWITC B2S.1 0. 8. 5 020008

6611/012 GEN SERV SW P2 DISPLAY: 1.48 FB_TYPE: MTWRCW FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 3 SUP.GRP: DELAY: 0 s AREA_ID: B3S.1 INS.CODE: XI STATION: AP05 EXE: 1600ms REV: 999

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 6611/012.1 BIU8 BI N/O RUNNING LOW FEEDBA B3S.1 4. 7. 3 050407
2 6611/012.2 BIU8 BI N/O RUNNING HIGH FEEDB B3S.1 4. 7. 4 050407
3 6611/012.3 BOU8(P) BO N/O START LOW COMMAND B3S.1 4. 8. 3 050408
4 6611/012.4 BOU8(P) BO N/O START HIGH COMMAN B3S.1 4. 8. 4 050408
5 6611/012.5 BOU8(P) BO N/O STOP COMMAND B3S.1 4. 8. 5 050408
6 6611/012.6 BIU8 BI N/C REMOTE/LOCAL SWITC B3S.1 4. 7. 5 050407

6614P101 MAIN SW DISC PRESS DISPLAY: 1.47 FB_TYPE: AI1L FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 16 SUP.GRP: DELAY: 0 s AREA_ID: T3S.1 INS.CODE: PIAL STATION: AP02 EXE: 2100ms REV: 999

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 6614P101.1 0,00 - 4,00 bar 0,00 1,00 0,00 0,00 AIU8LC 4-20mA 2w, MEAS., ALARM T3S.1 7. 5. 1 020705

6614P102 MAIN SW P2 PRESS DISPLAY: 1.47 FB_TYPE: BIO FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 3 SUP.GRP: DELAY: 0 s AREA_ID: B2S.1 INS.CODE: PSL STATION: AP02 EXE: 1000ms REV: 999

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 6614P102.1 BIU8 BI N/O SWITCH B2S.1 1. 9. 0 020109

6614P103 MAIN SW P1 PRESS DISPLAY: 1.47 FB_TYPE: BIO FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 3 SUP.GRP: DELAY: 0 s AREA_ID: B2S.1 INS.CODE: PSL STATION: AP02 EXE: 1000ms REV: 999

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 6614P103.1 BIU8 BI N/O SWITCH B2S.1 0.16. 4 020016

6614P104 SW PRESS SURP COND DISPLAY: 1.47 FB_TYPE: AI1LS FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 16 SUP.GRP: 23 DELAY: 0 s AREA_ID: T3S.1 INS.CODE: PIAL STATION: AP02 EXE: 2100ms REV: 999

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 6614P104.1 0,00 - 4,00 bar 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 AIU8LC 4-20mA 2w, MEAS., ALARM T3S.1 7. 5. 2 020705
Temporary Demo Version of EscapeE Copyright RedTitan 2002
VALMARINE AS INSTRUMENTATION LIST DATE : 07.09.2000 Page : 273
CUSTOMER : CCL BUILDING : KMYH NB499 DEPARTMENT : HARDWARE

6614P201 MAIN SW DISC PRES DISPLAY: 1.48 FB_TYPE: AI1L FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 16 SUP.GRP: DELAY: 0 s AREA_ID: T4P.1 INS.CODE: PIAL STATION: AP06 EXE: 2100ms REV: 999

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 6614P201.1 0,00 - 4,00 bar 0,00 1,00 0,00 0,00 AIU8LC 4-20mA 2w, MEAS., ALARM T4P.1 8. 5. 4 060805

6614P202 MAIN SW P4 PRES DISPLAY: 1.48 FB_TYPE: BIO FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 3 SUP.GRP: DELAY: 0 s AREA_ID: T4P.1 INS.CODE: PSL STATION: AP06 EXE: 1000ms REV: 999

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 6614P202.1 BIU8 BI N/O SWITCH T4P.1 8. 9. 6 060809

6614P203 MAIN SW P3 PRES DISPLAY: 1.48 FB_TYPE: BIO FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 3 SUP.GRP: DELAY: 0 s AREA_ID: T4P.1 INS.CODE: PSL STATION: AP06 EXE: 1000ms REV: 999

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 6614P203.1 BIU8 BI N/O SWITCH T4P.1 8. 9. 7 060809

6614P204 SW PRESS SURP COND DISPLAY: 1.48 FB_TYPE: AI1LS FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 16 SUP.GRP: 24 DELAY: 0 s AREA_ID: T4P.1 INS.CODE: PICAL STATION: AP06 EXE: 1400ms REV: 999

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 6614P204.1 0,00 - 4,00 bar 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 AIU8LC 4-20mA 2w, CONTROL, ALARM T4P.1 8. 5. 5 060805

6614P205 GS SW DISC PRES DISPLAY: 1.48 FB_TYPE: AI1 FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 3 SUP.GRP: DELAY: 0 s AREA_ID: T4P.1 INS.CODE: PI STATION: AP06 EXE: 2100ms REV: 999

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 6614P205.1 0,00 - 4,00 bar 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 AIU8LC 4-20mA 2w T4P.1 8. 5. 6 060805

6614P206 GS SW PUMP PRES DISPLAY: 1.48 FB_TYPE: BIO FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 3 SUP.GRP: DELAY: 0 s AREA_ID: T4P.1 INS.CODE: PSL STATION: AP06 EXE: 1000ms REV: 999

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 6614P206.1 BIU8 BI N/O SWITCH T4P.1 8.10. 0 060810

6614P207 GS SW PUMP PRES DISPLAY: 1.48 FB_TYPE: BIO FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 3 SUP.GRP: DELAY: 0 s AREA_ID: T4P.1 INS.CODE: PSL STATION: AP06 EXE: 1000ms REV: 999

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 6614P207.1 BIU8 BI N/O SWITCH T4P.1 8.10. 1 060810
Temporary Demo Version of EscapeE Copyright RedTitan 2002
VALMARINE AS INSTRUMENTATION LIST DATE : 07.09.2000 Page : 447
CUSTOMER : CCL BUILDING : KMYH NB499 DEPARTMENT : HARDWARE

9122T104 MG1 GENER WIND U DISPLAY: 2.6 FB_TYPE: TI1H FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 8 SUP.GRP: DELAY: 0 s AREA_ID: B2S.1 INS.CODE: TIAH STATION: AP02 EXE: 2100ms REV: 999

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 9122T104.1 0,00 - 200,00 C 0,00 0,00 140,00 200,00 TIU6 4W PT100 4w, MEAS., ALARM B2S.1 0. 7. 3 020007

9122T105 MG1 GENER WIND V DISPLAY: 2.6 FB_TYPE: TI1H FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 8 SUP.GRP: DELAY: 0 s AREA_ID: B2S.1 INS.CODE: TIAH STATION: AP02 EXE: 2100ms REV: 999

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 9122T105.1 0,00 - 200,00 C 0,00 0,00 140,00 200,00 TIU6 4W PT100 4w, MEAS., ALARM B2S.1 0. 7. 4 020007

9122T106 MG1 GENER WIND W DISPLAY: 2.6 FB_TYPE: TI1H FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 8 SUP.GRP: DELAY: 0 s AREA_ID: B2S.1 INS.CODE: TIAH STATION: AP02 EXE: 2100ms REV: 999

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 9122T106.1 0,00 - 200,00 C 0,00 0,00 140,00 200,00 TIU6 4W PT100 4w, MEAS., ALARM B2S.1 0. 7. 5 020007

9122T201 MG2 MOTOR WIND U DISPLAY: 2.6 FB_TYPE: TI1H FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 8 SUP.GRP: DELAY: 0 s AREA_ID: B3S.1 INS.CODE: TIAH STATION: AP05 EXE: 2100ms REV: 999

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 9122T201.1 0,00 - 200,00 C 0,00 0,00 140,00 200,00 TIU6 4W PT100 4w, MEAS., ALARM B3S.1 4. 6. 0 050406

9122T202 MG2 MOTOR WIND V DISPLAY: 2.6 FB_TYPE: TI1H FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 8 SUP.GRP: DELAY: 0 s AREA_ID: B3S.1 INS.CODE: TIAH STATION: AP05 EXE: 2100ms REV: 999

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 9122T202.1 0,00 - 200,00 C 0,00 0,00 140,00 200,00 TIU6 4W PT100 4w, MEAS., ALARM B3S.1 4. 6. 1 050406

9122T203 MG2 MOTOR WIND W DISPLAY: 2.6 FB_TYPE: TI1H FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 8 SUP.GRP: DELAY: 0 s AREA_ID: B3S.1 INS.CODE: TIAH STATION: AP05 EXE: 2100ms REV: 999

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 9122T203.1 0,00 - 200,00 C 0,00 0,00 140,00 200,00 TIU6 4W PT100 4w, MEAS., ALARM B3S.1 4. 6. 2 050406

9122T204 MG2 GENER WIND U DISPLAY: 2.6 FB_TYPE: TI1H FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 8 SUP.GRP: DELAY: 0 s AREA_ID: B3S.1 INS.CODE: TIAH STATION: AP05 EXE: 2100ms REV: 999

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 9122T204.1 0,00 - 200,00 C 0,00 0,00 140,00 200,00 TIU6 4W PT100 4w, MEAS., ALARM B3S.1 4. 6. 3 050406
Temporary Demo Version of EscapeE Copyright RedTitan 2002
VALMARINE AS INSTRUMENTATION LIST DATE : 07.09.2000 Page : 448
CUSTOMER : CCL BUILDING : KMYH NB499 DEPARTMENT : HARDWARE

9122T205 MG2 GENER WIND V DISPLAY: 2.6 FB_TYPE: TI1H FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 8 SUP.GRP: DELAY: 0 s AREA_ID: B3S.1 INS.CODE: TIAH STATION: AP05 EXE: 2100ms REV: 999

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 9122T205.1 0,00 - 200,00 C 0,00 0,00 140,00 200,00 TIU6 4W PT100 4w, MEAS., ALARM B3S.1 4. 6. 4 050406

9122T206 MG2 GENER WIND W DISPLAY: 2.6 FB_TYPE: TI1H FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 8 SUP.GRP: DELAY: 0 s AREA_ID: B3S.1 INS.CODE: TIAH STATION: AP05 EXE: 2100ms REV: 999

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 9122T206.1 0,00 - 200,00 C 0,00 0,00 140,00 200,00 TIU6 4W PT100 4w, MEAS., ALARM B3S.1 4. 6. 5 050406

9122X001 MG1 FAN DISPLAY: 2.6 FB_TYPE: MIMGFAN FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 8 SUP.GRP: DELAY: s AREA_ID: B2S.1 INS.CODE: XI STATION: AP01 EXE: 1000ms REV: NEW12

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 9122X001.1 BIU8 BI N/O RUNNING INDICATION B2S.1 10. 9. 6 011009

9122X002 MG2 FAN DISPLAY: 2.6 FB_TYPE: MIMGFAN FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 8 SUP.GRP: DELAY: s AREA_ID: B3S.1 INS.CODE: XI STATION: AP05 EXE: 1000ms REV: NEW12

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 9122X002.1 BIU8 BI N/O RUNNING INDICATION B3S.1 5. 8. 4 050508

9122X101 MG1 WATER LEAKAGE DISPLAY: 2.6 FB_TYPE: BIECA FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 8 SUP.GRP: DELAY: s AREA_ID: B2S.1 INS.CODE: XA STATION: AP02 EXE: 1000ms REV: NEW12

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 9122X101.1 BIU8 BI N/C ALARM B2S.1 0.14. 0 020014

9122X201 MG2 WATER LEAKAGE DISPLAY: 2.6 FB_TYPE: BIECA FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 8 SUP.GRP: DELAY: s AREA_ID: B3S.1 INS.CODE: XA STATION: AP05 EXE: 1000ms REV: NEW12

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 9122X201.1 BIU8 BI N/C ALARM B3S.1 4.13. 0 050413

9124X001 EDG BATTERY CHARGER DISPLAY: 6.62 FB_TYPE: BIECAD FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 8 SUP.GRP: DELAY: 30 s AREA_ID: T2S.2 INS.CODE: XA STATION: AP02 EXE: 1000ms REV: 999

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 9124X001.1 BIU8 BI N/C ALARM T2S.2 3. 6. 1 020306
VALMARINE AS INSTRUMENTATION LIST DATE : 07.09.2000 Page : 449
Temporary :
CUSTOMER Demo Version of EscapeE Copyright RedTitan 2002
CCL BUILDING : KMYH NB499 DEPARTMENT : HARDWARE

9125E001 EM LIHGT UPS1 DISPLAY: 2.9 FB_TYPE: AI1 FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 8 SUP.GRP: DELAY: 0 s AREA_ID: T2S.2 INS.CODE: EI STATION: AP02 EXE: 2100ms REV: 999

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 9125E001.1 -800,00 - 800,00 A 0,00 0,00 800,00 0,00 AIU8LC 4-20mA 2w T2S.2 3. 5. 3 020305

9125X001 EM LIHGT UPS1 COM AL DISPLAY: 2.9 FB_TYPE: BIECAD FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 8 SUP.GRP: DELAY: 30 s AREA_ID: T2S.2 INS.CODE: XA STATION: AP02 EXE: 1000ms REV: 999

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 9125X001.1 BIU8 BI N/C ALARM T2S.2 3. 6. 2 020306

9125X002 COMPUTER UPS2 FAIL DISPLAY: 2.9 FB_TYPE: BIECAD FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 16 SUP.GRP: DELAY: 30 s AREA_ID: B3S.1 INS.CODE: XA STATION: AP04 EXE: 1000ms REV: 999

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 9125X002.1 BIU8 BI N/C ALARM B3S.1 10. 9. 6 041009

9131E101 CC1.1 CURRENT DISPLAY: 1.1 FB_TYPE: AI1 FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 4 SUP.GRP: DELAY: 0 s AREA_ID: B2S.1 INS.CODE: EI STATION: AP01 EXE: 2100ms REV: 999

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 9131E101.1 0,00 - 1000,00 A 0,00 0,00 1000,00 0,00 AIU8LC 4-20mA 2w B2S.1 9. 5. 0 010905

9131E102 CC1.1 POWER DISPLAY: 3.4 FB_TYPE: AI1 FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 4 SUP.GRP: DELAY: 0 s AREA_ID: B2S.1 INS.CODE: EI STATION: AP01 EXE: 2100ms REV: 999

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 9131E102.1 -12,00 - 12,00 MW 0,00 -12,00 12,00 0,00 AIU8LC 4-20mA 2w B2S.1 9. 5. 1 010905

9131E103 CC1.2 CURRENT DISPLAY: 1.1 FB_TYPE: AI1 FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 4 SUP.GRP: DELAY: 0 s AREA_ID: B2S.1 INS.CODE: EI STATION: AP01 EXE: 2100ms REV: 999

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 9131E103.1 0,00 - 1000,00 A 0,00 0,00 1000,00 0,00 AIU8LC 4-20mA 2w B2S.1 9. 5. 2 010905

9131E104 CC1.2 POWER DISPLAY: 3.4 FB_TYPE: AI1 FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 4 SUP.GRP: DELAY: 0 s AREA_ID: B2S.1 INS.CODE: EI STATION: AP01 EXE: 2100ms REV: 999

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 9131E104.1 -12,00 - 12,00 MW 0,00 -12,00 12,00 0,00 AIU8LC 4-20mA 2w B2S.1 9. 5. 3 010905
Temporary Demo
VALMARINE ASVersion of EscapeE Copyright RedTitan 2002 INSTRUMENTATION LIST DATE : 07.09.2000 Page : 450
CUSTOMER : CCL BUILDING : KMYH NB499 DEPARTMENT : HARDWARE

9131E105 T11 CURRENT DISPLAY: 2.5 FB_TYPE: AI1 FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 4 SUP.GRP: DELAY: 0 s AREA_ID: B2S.1 INS.CODE: EI STATION: AP01 EXE: 2100ms REV: 999

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 9131E105.1 0,00 - 300,00 A 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 AIU8LC 4-20mA 2w B2S.1 9. 5. 4 010905

9131E106 PS1/T13 CURRENT DISPLAY: 1.1 FB_TYPE: AI1 FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 4 SUP.GRP: DELAY: 0 s AREA_ID: B2S.1 INS.CODE: EI STATION: AP01 EXE: 2100ms REV: 999

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 9131E106.1 0,00 - 300,00 A 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 AIU8LC 4-20mA 2w B2S.1 9. 5. 5 010905

9131E107 T15 CURRENT DISPLAY: 1.1 FB_TYPE: AI1 FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 4 SUP.GRP: DELAY: 0 s AREA_ID: B2S.1 INS.CODE: EI STATION: AP01 EXE: 2100ms REV: 999

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 9131E107.1 0,00 - 100,00 A 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 AIU8LC 4-20mA 2w B2S.1 9. 5. 6 010905

9131E108 MG1 PRIMARY CURRENT DISPLAY: 1.1 FB_TYPE: AI1MTRGEN FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 4 SUP.GRP: DELAY: 0 s AREA_ID: B2S.1 INS.CODE: EI STATION: AP01 EXE: 2100ms REV: 999

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 9131E108.1 0,00 - 200,00 A 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 AIU8LC 4-20mA 2w B2S.1 9. 5. 7 010905

9131E110 THR1 CURRENT DISPLAY: 1.1 FB_TYPE: AI1MTRGEN FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 9 SUP.GRP: DELAY: 0 s AREA_ID: B2S.1 INS.CODE: EI STATION: AP01 EXE: 400 ms REV: 999

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 9131E110.1 0,00 - 150,00 A 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 AIU8LC 4-20mA 2w B2S.1 9. 6. 1 010906

9131E111 THR2 CURRENT DISPLAY: 1.1 FB_TYPE: AI1MTRGEN FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 9 SUP.GRP: DELAY: 0 s AREA_ID: B2S.1 INS.CODE: EI STATION: AP01 EXE: 400 ms REV: 999

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 9131E111.1 0,00 - 150,00 A 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 AIU8LC 4-20mA 2w B2S.1 9. 6. 2 010906

9131E112 AC1 CURRENT DISPLAY: 1.1 FB_TYPE: AI1MTRGEN FUNCTION:


CTRLROOM NO.: A1 AL.GRP: 4 SUP.GRP: DELAY: 0 s AREA_ID: B2S.1 INS.CODE: EI STATION: AP01 EXE: 400 ms REV: 999

ORDER DEVICETAG MIN MAX UNIT ALARM LIMITS CARD TYPE SIGNAL TYPE DEVICE REMARK IO-CABINET ADDRESS TERM. BOARD
LL L H HH
1 9131E112.1 0,00 - 150,00 A 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 AIU8LC 4-20mA 2w B2S.1 9. 6. 3 010906
VALMARINE

Power Supply
VALMARINE
VPU
VPU is an uninterrupted DC power supply
supply. It is used to supply power
to a VME basic module.

In case of power failures, VPU's output power can be supported with


SPU (Standby Power Unit). In normal conditions the SPU is charged
from the VPU's intermediate power circuit.

The power supplies can be stopped with the DC OUT switch on the
front panel of VPU.

The fan power supply is controlled with a relay which is activated as


long as the DC/DC power supplies are operating.

2
VALMARINE
SPU
SPU is a battery power supply unit which is used to ensure the output power of the VPU DC supplies during
mains power failures.

SPU is installed in a support housing, where the battery cartridge is inserted. The battery cartridge can be
serviced (and replaced) by removing the 4 screws on the front panel and by pulling out the battery cartridge.

Capacity : 24Ah
Charging : 1A pr hour

One SPU is calculated to supply the Basic Modules (max.


(max 6) for at least 1/2 hour.
hour

3
VALMARINE
VPU2
VPU 2
VPU2 is an uninterrupted DC power supply
supply. It is used to supply
power to a VME basic module.

In case of power failures, VPU2's output power can be supported


with SPUC (Standby Power Unit). In normal conditions the SPUC is
charged from the VPU2s intermediate power circuit.

The power supplies can be stopped with the MAINS switch on the
front panel of VPU2.

The fan power supply is controlled with a DC/DC converter which is


activated as long as the DC ( 28 V) power supplies are present.

4
SPUC
SPU C
VALMARINE

SPUC is a battery power supply unit which is used to ensure the output power of the VPU DC supplies during
mains power failures.
SPUC is installed in a support housing, where the battery and BCU (battery charging and monitoring unit)
cartridge is inserted. The BCU automatically tests a battery using the short test once the battery has been fully
charged fore the first time,
time and after this,
this at 30-day
30 day intervals.If
intervals If the battery is not full when the test starts or the
BCU gives an alarm about some fault, the test will be postponed.The SPUC can be serviced (and replaced) by
removing the 4 screws on the front panel and by pulling out the battery cartridge.
Capacity : 38Ah Charging : 1.1
1 1 A / hour
One SPU is calculated to supply the Basic Modules (max. 6) for at least 1/2 hour.

FC = Fully Charged
CH = Charging
DISCH = Discharging
EB = Empty Battery
FAULT
TEST = Testing in progress
GOOD= Battery is in good order
IMP=The battery has degraded
BAD=Battery is bad
5
VALMARINE
VPU SPU & BTMU EL
VPU,SPU EL.DWG.
DWG

Ê Simplified electrical drawing VPU

6
Connection between VPU and SPU
VALMARINE

7
VALMARINE IPU
IPU operates
p as p
power supply
pp y for an I/O
subrack, generating the required operating
power for the I/O cards.

When Mains Power disappear the IPU will be


supplied by the FPUS.

8
VALMARINE
FPUS
FPUS is a DC p
power supply
pp y for a field I/O subrack. Its maximum output
p p power is 250 W.

FPUS output power can be backed up with 2 x 12 V, 6.5 Ah lead-acid batteries mounted in connection with the
FPUS.

It supplies power to two I/O subracks with cards.

FPUS generates the IPUSTOP signal which prevents the switching on of the I/O Power Units (IPU) at less than
24 V supply voltage; FPUS also prevents deep discharging of the standby batteries

FPUS, IPU, and ETMU

9
FPUS; Earth Fault
VALMARINE
M it i
Monitoring Unit
U it
Purpose
The Earth Fault Monitoring Unit is used for earth fault monitoring of the FPUS DC power supply the
Damatic I/O units. The Earth Fault Monitoring Unit is shown in figure .
81 mm

56 mm
61 mm

The earth fault monitoring unit gives alarm in control room.


There is two indicator leds on the unit:
Green : No Earth or fail
Red led : Earth fault
10
FPUS; Earth Fault
VALMARINE
M it i
Monitoring Unit
U it .El.
El Dwg.
D
The Earth Fault Monitoring Unit have screw clamp terminals for connection of the wires. The Earth Fault
Monitoring Unit is provided with alarm contact and onboard status LEDs. The figure shows the signal line of
Earth Fault Monitoring Unit.

:
11
VALMARINE BTMU - Battery
B tt M
Monitoring
it i Units
U it
The system cabinets battery unit (SPU) and IO-cabinet battery unit (FPUS) is connected to battery monitoring
units (BTMU).
The unit is constructed to work as an independent system consisting of one BTMU electronic unit and one
external BTMU load unit.
The following are connected to the BTMU:
• 1. AC supply voltage, 230 VAC( same voltage as the supply voltage to VPU/FPUS)
• 2. Battery voltage
• 3. BTMU load

Outputs
• BTMU Alarm, normally closed contact in normal operating conditions. The alarm contact gives a
pulse train signal
p g to indicate batteryy capacity
p y ((load)) test to the Damatic system.
y
The alarm is activated by :
¾ * Low battery capacity, < 21.5 VDC within test period
¾ * Low battery voltage, < 21.0 VDC
¾ * Test
T t load
l d nott connected,
t d > 26.0
26 0 VDC 6060sec after
ft T2 started
t t d ((no lload
d connected)
t d)
¾ * SPU fuse failure ( fuse blown in SPU unit).
¾ * FPUS fuse or AC supply failure ( black-out or FPUS AC voltage switched off).
¾ * BTMU AC failure ( black-out or no 220VAC switched off on the Switchboard))
¾ * Immediate AC failure (optional)

The BTMU also monitors the output fuse in the FPUS or the SPU, and gives alarm if fuse tripped. FPUS AC
power alarm contact is connected in series with the fuse tripped contact and gives alarm as well
well. Additionally
the BTMU 230 VAC failure alarm can be connected in series with the BTMU alarm, selected via jumper/dip
switch J5.
12
VALMARINE
B tt
Battery M
Monitoring
it i Units
U it
NB! The operator
p must pphysically
y y take a look at the BTMU, to see witch kind of alarm coming
g
from the unit, as we are using a common alarm for Battery and AC failure when J5 is ON.
The kind of alarm can be identified by looking at the LED indication on the BTMU.

LED Indications :
• AC ON – Green LED on, when 230 VAC supply voltage is present
• AC FAILURE – Red LED on, when 230 VAC supply voltage is not present
• BTMU RUNNING – Green LED on, during normal operation
• BTMU ALARM – Red LED on, when alarm condition is present
• TEST ON – Yellow LED on, when test is running

Push
P h Button
B :
B1 - Reset – two functions :
• Reset of BTMU Alarm if activated by low battery capacity, or test load not connected during capacity test, T2
• Manual reset of timer sequence.
q Battery
y capacity
p y test starts after a time delay,
y, T1.

D
Description
i ti off BTMU
BTMU.
Standard dwg.

13
VALMARINE
B tt
Battery M
Monitoring
it i Units
U it
Description
p of the Jumpers/Dip
p p switches J1-J5:
DIP switch settings (PCB Version F) or Jumper settings (PCB Version E) :

J1 - select test or normal operation. Test sequence timers T1 / T2 / T3 are 60 / 60 / 60 seconds.


Normal operation has start-up
start up delay 72 hours (T1) and 87 days (T3) interval time.
time
One complete sequence (cycle) is 90 days.

J2 - select type of power unit with battery back-up, i.e. FPUS or SPU.
Capacity (load) test time (T2) is 120minutes for FPUS and 180 minutes for SPU.

J3 and J4 - is spare.
J5 - Disabling BTMU AC failure alarm contact (when OFF)

A manual test can be done anytime by make a link from 5 to 6 at the BTMU terminal board.
As long as the link is connected we then the BTMU is in the T2-TEST
T2 TEST sequence.
sequence

14
VALMARINE
B tt
Battery M
Monitoring
it i Units
U it
The BTMU is made to continuously monitor the backup battery voltage of FPUS and SPU power supplies.
Once every 90th day the BTMU connects the batteries to the BTMU load unit, in order to test the battery
capacity. The same BTMU units, i.e. electronic part and load test part, are used for both FPUS and SPU with
only a slight difference in external connection.
O BTMU is
One i needed
d d for
f each h FPUS or SPU

The BTMU is running through a sequence of three time periods T1, T2 and T3.
T1 isa time delayy to ensure completely
p y charged
g batteries at test start,, T2 is the test time and T3 is the time to the
start of next sequence. The total time of one sequence is T1+T2+T3.
The sequence of the BTMU is shown in figure 1.

15
VALMARINE
B tt
Battery M
Monitoring
it i Units
U it

BTMU layout.

16
Product Description
“Battery Test & Monitoring Unit”
BTMU
PCB Version E & F
EPROM Version V_3F40

Summary:
This document contains technical product information about the CAE Valmarine BTMU, Battery Test & Monitoring Unit.

Document id: T00062


Rev. Issue date Reason for issue Issued by Checked Approved

A0 25.02.02 First issue LIM SID LES

File No.: BTMU-Product Description verson E & F.doc Page 1 of 14


Product Description Damatic
Battery Test & Monitoring Unit Marine System
PCB Ver. E & F, EPROM Version V_3F40

Section Table Of Contents Page

1 GENERAL........................................................................................................................ 4
1.1 PURPOSE ................................ ......................................................................................... 4
1.2 TARGET GROUPS................................ ............................................................................. 4
1.3 DOCUMENT STORAGE................................................................................................ ..... 4
1.4 DOCUMENT R ESPONSIBLE ............................................................................................... 4
1.5 RELATED DOCUMENTS.................................................................................................... 4
1.6 DOCUMENT HISTORY...................................................................................................... 4
1.7 ABBREVIATIONS.............................................................................................................. 4
2 BATTERY TEST & MONITORING UNIT.................................................................... 5

3 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................ 5


3.1 CONSTRUCTION .............................................................................................................. 5
3.2 I NTERFACES.................................................................................................................... 5
4 FUNCTION ...................................................................................................................... 6
4.1 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 6
4.2 BTMU IN USE WITH FPUS :................................................................ ............................. 7
4.3 BTMU IN USE WITH SPU/VPU : ...................................................................................... 8
5 OPTIONAL USE.............................................................................................................. 8
5.1 BTMU EXTERNAL CONTROL .......................................................................................... 8
6 LAYOUT DRAWINGS................................................................................................ ... 10

7 BTMU CONTROL LOGIC SPECIFICATION ............................................................ 11


7.1 ALARMS - INTERNAL PARAMETERS.................................................................................11
7.2 BATTERY VOLTAGE LIMIT S.............................................................................................11
7.3 SEQUENCE TIMERS .........................................................................................................11
7.4 I NITIALISE THE BTMU ...................................................................................................11
7.5 SIGNAL MONITORING .....................................................................................................11
7.5.1 Battery voltage................................................................................................ ... 11
7.5.2 Reset .................................................................................................................. 12
7.5.3 Manual test ........................................................................................................ 12
7.5.4 Battery fuse trip contact / FPUS AC fail ............................................................ 12
7.6 ALARM CONDITIONS, SET & RESET .................................................................................12
7.6.1 A1 - DC_FAIL, battery voltage too low.............................................................. 12
7.6.2 A2 - BATT_FAIL, battery capacity too low......................................................... 12
7.6.3 A3 - TEST_FAIL, test load do not discharge battery .......................................... 12
7.6.4 A4 - FPUS_FAIL, FPUS alarm contact opened, not set if blackout ................... 12
7.6.5 A5 - SPU_FAIL, battery fuse alarm contact opened........................................... 12
7.6.6 A6 - BTMU_AC_FAIL........................................................................................ 12
7.6.7 A7 - CHARGE_FAIL .......................................................................................... 12
7.7 SEQUENCE TIMERS .........................................................................................................12
7.8 SEQUENCE CONTROL ......................................................................................................12
7.8.1 Forced step T1 - RESET pushbutton .................................................................. 13
7.8.2 Forced step T2 - Manual_start battery test ........................................................ 13
Document No.: T00062 Rev. No.: A0
File No.: BTMU-Product Description verson E & F.doc Page 2 of 14
Product Description Damatic
Battery Test & Monitoring Unit Marine System
PCB Ver. E & F, EPROM Version V_3F40

7.8.3 Sequence step T1 - START ................................................................................. 13


7.8.4 Sequence step T2 - TEST.................................................................................... 13
7.8.5 Sequence step T3 - INTERVAL ........................................................................... 14
7.8.6 Sequence end..................................................................................................... 14
7.9 SIGNAL OUTPUTS...........................................................................................................14
7.9.1 BTM U_FAILURE................................ ............................................................... 14
7.9.2 TEST RUNNING................................................................................................. 14
7.9.3 TEST LOAD ................................................................ ....................................... 14

Document No.: T00062 Rev. No.: A0


File No.: BTMU-Product Description verson E & F.doc Page 3 of 14
Product Description Damatic
Battery Test & Monitoring Unit Marine System
PCB Ver. E & F, EPROM Version V_3F40

1 General
1.1 Purpose
The purpose of this document is to give a technical description of the Battery Test & Monitoring Unit.

1.2 Target Groups


The document is aimed for following target groups:
• Shipyard – Electrical Design Dept.
• Ship Owner
• CAE Valmarine – Technical Dept.

1.3 Document Storage


This document is stored under:
1 V:\Product_pub\Standard Drawings\Terminal Board\T00062A0.doc
1.4 Document Responsible
The Product Manager is responsible for this document.

1.5 Related Documents


NA

1.6 Document History

Rev Description of change Reason for Change

A0 This is the first issue. The document covers the Battery New EPROM program version
Test & Monitoring Unit BTMU2 (02VA0153), PCB was implemented to prevent
versions E and F with EPROM version 3_F40, together undesirable battery discharge
with BTMU2 Load Unit (02VA0154). after AC failure.

1.7 Abbreviations
BTMU Battery Test & Monitoring Unit
FPUS Field Power Unit Single-phase
I/O Input and Output units
SPU Standby Power Unit
VPU VME Power Unit

Document No.: T00062 Rev. No.: A0


File No.: BTMU-Product Description verson E & F.doc Page 4 of 14
Product Description Damatic
Battery Test & Monitoring Unit Marine System
PCB Ver. E & F, EPROM Version V_3F40

2 Battery Test & Monitoring Unit


The Battery Test & Monitoring Unit (BTMU) is used to automatically perform periodic battery
capacity tests and to monitor the voltage of the battery package included in the SPU in Damatic
System Cabinets and the FPUS in the Damatic I/O Cabinets.

3 Technical Description
3.1 Construction
The unit is constructed to work as an independent system consisting of one BTMU electronic unit and
one external BTMU load unit, both suitable for rail mounting.
3.2 Interfaces
• AC supply voltage, 230 VAC, same as the supply voltage to VPU/FPUS
• Battery voltage
• BTMU load

Outputs
• BTMU Alarm, normally closed contact in normal operating conditions. The alarm contact gives a
pulse train signal to indicate battery capacity (load) test to the Damatic system.
The alarm is activated by :
Ø Low battery capacity, < 23.5 VDC within test period
Ø Low battery voltage, < 21.0 VDC
Ø Test load not connected, > 26.0 VDC 60sec after T2 started
Ø SPU fuse failure
Ø FPUS fuse or AC supply failure
Ø BTMU AC failure
Ø Immediate AC failure (optional)
• Test Running, closed during battery load test

Inputs
• Manual battery capacity test start (normally not used)

LED Indications :
• AC ON – Green LED on, when 230 VAC supply voltage is present
• AC FAILURE – Red LED on, when 230 VAC supply voltage is not present
• BTMU RUNNING – Green LED on, during normal operation
• BTMU ALARM – Red LED on, when alarm condition is present
• TEST ON – Yellow LED on, when test is running

Fuses :
F1 – 500 mA, DC supply from FPUS or SPU
F2 – 500 mA, AC supply

Push Button :
B1 - Reset – two functions :
• Reset of BTMU Alarm if activated by low battery capacity, or test load not connected during
capacity test, T2
Document No.: T00062 Rev. No.: A0
File No.: BTMU-Product Description verson E & F.doc Page 5 of 14
Product Description Damatic
Battery Test & Monitoring Unit Marine System
PCB Ver. E & F, EPROM Version V_3F40

• Manual reset of timer sequence. Battery capacity test starts after a time delay, T1.

DIP switch settings (PCB Version F) or Jumper settings (PCB Version E) :


J1 - select test or normal operation. Test sequence timers T1 / T2 / T3 are 60 / 60 / 60 seconds.
Normal operation has start-up delay 72 hours (T1) and 87 days (T3) interval time.
One complete sequence (cycle) is 90 days.
Operation J1
Normal OFF
Test ON

J2 - select type of power unit with battery back-up, i.e. FPUS or SPU.
Capacity (load) test time (T2) is 120minutes for FPUS and 180 minutes for SPU.
Mode J2
FPUS OFF
SPU ON

J3 - spare
J4 - spare
J5 - Disabling BTMU AC failure alarm contact (when OFF)

4 Function
4.1 General
The BTMU is made to continuously monitor the backup battery voltage of FPUS and SPU power
th
supplies. Once every 90 day the BTMU connects the batteries to the BTMU load unit, in order to test
the battery capacity. The same BTMU units, i.e. electronic part and load test part, are used for both
FPUS and SPU with only a slight difference in external connection.
One BTMU is needed for each FPUS or SPU.

The BTMU is running through a sequence of three time periods T1, T2 and T3.
T1 is a time delay to ensure completely charged batteries at test start, T2 is the test time and T3 is the
time to the start of next sequence. The total time of one sequence is T1+T2+T3.
The sequence of the BTMU is shown in figure 1.

Start of T1-START T2-TEST T3-INTERVAL Start of new


Sequence sequence
(Recharge Time) 2-/3- hours (Time to start of next sequence)
72 hours 87 days

Figure 1. BTMU Sequence Chart.

Document No.: T00062 Rev. No.: A0


File No.: BTMU-Product Description verson E & F.doc Page 6 of 14
Product Description Damatic
Battery Test & Monitoring Unit Marine System
PCB Ver. E & F, EPROM Version V_3F40

At battery capacity (load) test, the BTMU makes a square signal pulse train on the alarm contact
output terminal. The alarm contact opens for two seconds, closes for two seconds and so on. This
pulse train signal is used in the Damatic system as information about when tests have been performed.

The BTMU gives alarm when the battery voltage drops below 21.0 VDC.
The BTMU also monitors the output fuse in the FPUS or the SPU, and gives alarm if fuse tripped.
FPUS AC power alarm contact is connected in series with the fuse tripped contact and gives alarm as
well. Additionally the BTMU 230 VAC failure alarm can be connected in series with the BTMU
alarm, selected via jumper/dip switch J5.

An alarm from the BTMU during test period T2, activated either by low battery capacity or test load
not connected, needs to be acknowledged with the Reset push button B1 on the BTMU. Other alarms
are automatically reset when battery voltage gets higher than 24.6 VDC, or the failure causing the
alarm is corrected.

4.2 BTMU in use with FPUS :


The internal battery pack of the FPUS is connected to an internal battery charger with a capacity of
0.8A. During a battery capacity test, the BTMU load unit of ∼2.3A is connected as an additional load
to the FPUS. The additional load of ∼1.5A not supplied by the charger, will then be supplied from the
batteries for a test period of 2 hours. If the batteries are in bad condition, the voltage will decrease to
below a pre-set limit of 23.5 VDC and the alarm output is activated.

DIP switch/jumper setting for FPUS :


J1 – OFF
J2 – OFF
J3 – OFF
J4 – OFF
J5 – ON

The principle of how to connect the BTMU to the FPUS is shown figure 2.

Document No.: T00062 Rev. No.: A0


File No.: BTMU-Product Description verson E & F.doc Page 7 of 14
Product Description Damatic
Battery Test & Monitoring Unit Marine System
PCB Ver. E & F, EPROM Version V_3F40

Figure 2. BTMU and FPUS - Principle of Connection

4.3 BTMU in use with SPU/VPU :


The SPU is charged from a separate output from one VPU, or several VPU’s connected in parallel.
This gives a maximum charge current of up to 6A when 6 VPU’s are in use.
During the battery capacity test, the charging current is disconnected and the SPU is connected to the
BTMU test load of ∼2.3A for a period of 3 hours. If the batteries are in bad condition, the voltage will
decrease to below a pre-set limit of 23.5 VDC and the alarm output is activated.

DIP switch/jumper setting for SPU :


J1 – OFF
J2 – ON
J3 – OFF
J4 – OFF
J5 – ON

The principle of how to connect the BTMU to the SPU is shown figure 3.

Figure 3. BTMU and SPU - Principle of Connection

5 Optional Use
5.1 BTMU External Control
The BTMU can initiate battery capacity testing from an external control signal. The BTMU control
logic will check conditions and start the test if battery voltage > 27 VDC, AC supply is OK and battery
fuse not tripped.
Document No.: T00062 Rev. No.: A0
File No.: BTMU-Product Description verson E & F.doc Page 8 of 14
Product Description Damatic
Battery Test & Monitoring Unit Marine System
PCB Ver. E & F, EPROM Version V_3F40

Normal timer sequence is then interrupted and the BTMU control logic will enter state T2, test period
timer. The BTMU alarm output signal pulse train at test, can be used as feedback for test started. The
“Test Running” output from the BTMU is as well available, but normally not used.
The control signal has to be reactivated to start a new test. A continuous closed contact will not
reactivate test.

Document No.: T00062 Rev. No.: A0


File No.: BTMU-Product Description verson E & F.doc Page 9 of 14
Product Description Damatic
Battery Test & Monitoring Unit Marine System
PCB Ver. E & F, EPROM Version V_3F40

6 Layout Drawings
Figures 4 and 5 shows a partial component arrangement of the BTMU electronic and load units.

B1 - Onboard timer reset push button.


F1 - Fuse, DC Supply.
F2 - Fuse, AC Supply.
J1 - DIP switch / jumper, normal or test timers
J2 - DIP switch / jumper, FPUS or SPU mode
J3 - DIP switch / jumper, spare
J4 - DIP switch / jumper, spare
J5 - DIP switch / jumper, disabling BTMU AC failure alarm contact
P1 - Potentiometer, adjustment of battery voltage measurement
Q4 - EPROM
X1 - Relay, test run
X2 - Relay, BTMU alarm
X3 - Relay, AC failure alarm
X4 - Relay, test run

15
16

14

RUNNING
X1 FAILURE
13

ALARM
BTMU

BTMU
12 ON
TEST ON

ON
AC

AC
L2

11 12 345
10
J1
J2
J3
J4
J5
X4
9
8
7 X2
6
5 Q4
4
3

RESET
B1
F1 P1

2 X3
1 F2

Figure 4. BTMU Layout, PCB version F. Figure 5. BTMU Load Layout

Document No.: T00062 Rev. No.: A0


File No.: BTMU-Product Description verson E & F.doc Page 10 of 14
Product Description Damatic
Battery Test & Monitoring Unit Marine System
PCB Ver. E & F, EPROM Version V_3F40

7 BTMU control logic specification


7.1 Alarms - internal parameters
A. Name
No
A1 DC_FAIL <21.0
A2 BATT_FAIL <23.5 & T2 5s delay Needs reset
A3 TEST_FAIL >26.0 & T2 120s delay Reset / Next test
A4 FPUS_FAIL AL_IN & 5s delay Both FPUS AC and fuse
BTMU_AC ok tripped. No alarm if
blackout.
A5 SPU_FAIL AL_IN 5s
A6 BTMU_AC_FAIL BTMU_AC missing 25min delay
A7 CHARGE_FAIL <27.0 & BTMU_AC 48h delay
OK (60s in testop.)

7.2 Battery voltage limits


V. No Name
V1 210 21.0 VDC Minimum VDC level, low alarm
V2 235 23.5 VDC Capacity test minimum VDC
V3 245 24.5 VDC Reset limit
V4 250 26.0 VDC Maximum VDC during load test
V5 270 27.0 VDC Minimum VDC for start load test and check battery charging

7.3 Sequence Timers


T.No Name
T1I START_TIMER 3d
T2Ia TEST_TIMER_FPUS 120m
T2Ib TEST_TIMER_SPU 180m
T3I INTERVAL_TIMER 87d
TT1I START_TIMER_T 60s
TT2I TEST_TIMER_T 60s
TT3I INTERVAL_TIMER_T 60s

7.4 Initialise the BTMU


Loss of DC power.
- The unit shall enter sequence step T1 - START.
End of T3 or any other undefined state (all T1/2/3 are OFF)
- The unit shall enter sequence step T1 - START.
7.5 Signal monitoring

7.5.1 Battery voltage


All voltage limits checked, update status for signal V1,2,3..

Document No.: T00062 Rev. No.: A0


File No.: BTMU-Product Description verson E & F.doc Page 11 of 14
Product Description Damatic
Battery Test & Monitoring Unit Marine System
PCB Ver. E & F, EPROM Version V_3F40

7.5.2 Reset
RESET = rising edge RESET input
AL_RESET= RESET or rising edge T2
7.5.3 Manual test
MANUAL_TEST = rising edge MANUAL_TEST input & NOT T2
7.5.4 Battery fuse trip contact / FPUS AC fail
AL_IN = STOP input is true when external contact is open.
7.6 Alarm conditions, set & reset

7.6.1 A1 - DC_FAIL, battery voltage too low


Set if NOT 210
Reset if 245
7.6.2 A2 - BATT_FAIL, battery capacity too low
Set if delay_5s (NOT 235 & T2)
Reset if 245 & AL_RESET
7.6.3 A3 - TEST_FAIL, test load do not discharge battery
Set if delay_120s (250 & T2)
Reset if AL_RESET
7.6.4 A4 - FPUS_FAIL, FPUS alarm contact opened, not set if blackout
Set if delay_5s (AL_IN & BTMU_AC & NOT J2)
Reset if NOT AL_IN
7.6.5 A5 - SPU_FAIL, battery fuse alarm contact opened
Set if delay_5s (AL_IN & J2)
Reset if NOT AL_IN
7.6.6 A6 - BTMU_AC_FAIL
Set if delay_25m (NOT BTMU_AC)
Reset if BTMU_AC
7.6.7 A7 - CHARGE_FAIL
Set if delay_48h (BTMU_AC & NOT 270)
Reset if AL_RESET + 270
7.7 Sequence timers
Timer values are loaded according jumper settings J1 and J2
If J1 (TEST timers) then
T1_init=TT1I
T2_init=TT2I
T3_init=TT3I
Else
T1_init=T1I
T3_init=T3I
if J2 (SPU mode) then T2_init=T2Ib else T2_init=T2Ia
7.8 Sequence control

Document No.: T00062 Rev. No.: A0


File No.: BTMU-Product Description verson E & F.doc Page 12 of 14
Product Description Damatic
Battery Test & Monitoring Unit Marine System
PCB Ver. E & F, EPROM Version V_3F40

Each controller cycle executes actual step logic. Transition to next step by set new step and reset own.
7.8.1 Forced step T1 - RESET pushbutton
If RESET then
set T1
reset T2
reset T3
T1_timer=T1_init
jump end (of sequences)
7.8.2 Forced step T2 - Manual_start battery test
If MANUAL_TEST AND NOT T2 AND 270 AND BTMU_AC AND NOT AL_IN then
set T2
reset T1
reset T3
T2_timer=T2_init
jump end (of sequences)
7.8.3 Sequence step T1 - START
If T1_timer == 0 then
T1_timer=T1_init ;timer start precaution

If 245 AND BTMU_AC AND NOT AL_IN then


count down T1_timer
Else
T1_timer=T1_init

If T1_timer elapsed AND 270 then


set T2
reset T1
reset T3
T2_timer=T2_init
jump end (of sequences)
7.8.4 Sequence step T2 - TEST
If NOT A2(BATT_FAIL) AND BTMU_AC AND NOT A4(FPUS_FAIL) AND NOT
A5(SPU_FAIL) AND NOT A3(TEST_FAIL) then count down T2_timer
Else
set T1
reset T2
reset T3
T1_timer=T1_init
jump end (of sequences)

If T2_timer elapsed then


set T3
reset T1
reset T2
T3_timer=T3_init
jump end (of sequences)

Document No.: T00062 Rev. No.: A0


File No.: BTMU-Product Description verson E & F.doc Page 13 of 14
Product Description Damatic
Battery Test & Monitoring Unit Marine System
PCB Ver. E & F, EPROM Version V_3F40

7.8.5 Sequence step T3 - INTERVAL


Do count down T3_timer
If T3_timer elapsed then
set T1
reset T2
reset T3
T1_timer=T1_init
jump end (of sequences)
7.8.6 Sequence end
No actions

7.9 Signal outputs

7.9.1 BTMU_FAILURE
If T2 started then
signal=pulse sequence (2s OFF/2s ON continued during whole test)
Else
signal=A1+A2+A3+A4+A5+A6+A7

Observe that pulse sequence shall start and end with OFF state (closed contact), thereafter update
according alarm conditions.
7.9.2 TEST RUNNING
Do
signal=T2
7.9.3 TEST LOAD
Do
signal=T2

Document No.: T00062 Rev. No.: A0


File No.: BTMU-Product Description verson E & F.doc Page 14 of 14
CAE Valmarine
Extension Alarm System
User manual

Summary:
This document is the end user manual for the CAE Valmarine EAS panel network.

Document id:
Project No:
Rev. Issue date Reason for issue Issued by Checked Approved

A0 130503 First issue ERG LES OAJ

File No.: T61201A0.doc Page 1 of 16


Extension Alarm System Damatic DNA
User Manual Marine System

Section Table Of Contents Page

1 GENERAL .....................................................................................................................................3
1.1 PURPOSE ......................................................................................................................................3
1.2 TARGET GROUPS .........................................................................................................................3
1.3 DOCUMENT STORAGE .................................................................................................................3
1.4 DOCUMENT RESPONSIBLE ...........................................................................................................3
1.5 RELATED DOCUMENTS ................................................................................................................3
1.6 DOCUMENT HISTORY ..................................................................................................................3
1.7 DEFINITIONS ................................................................................................................................3
1.7.1 Abbreviations......................................................................................................................3
1.7.2 Definition of Expressions ...................................................................................................3
2 INTRODUCTION .........................................................................................................................4
2.1 BASIC FUNCTIONALITY ...............................................................................................................4
2.2 FRONT PANEL LAYOUT ................................................................................................................4
2.3 THE DISPLAY ...............................................................................................................................7
2.4 PANEL NETWORK.........................................................................................................................7
2.5 OPERATING MODES .....................................................................................................................8
3 SOFTWARE PANEL IN ECR.....................................................................................................9

4 PANEL MENUS AND SCREENS .............................................................................................10


4.1 HOME/MAIN ...............................................................................................................................10
4.2 FAILURE INDICATION ................................................................................................................10
4.3 ALARMS.....................................................................................................................................10
4.3.1 Alarm groups transmitted from Damatic DNA.................................................................11
4.3.2 Home picture ....................................................................................................................11
4.3.3 Local acknowledge ...........................................................................................................11
4.3.4 Alarm list ..........................................................................................................................12
4.3.5 View alarms from a single group .....................................................................................12
4.3.6 Compress/Expand function...............................................................................................12
4.3.7 Timestamp and scrolling ..................................................................................................13
4.4 ASSIST CALL .............................................................................................................................13
4.5 TRANSFER OF RESPONSIBILITY / UMS MODE ...........................................................................14
4.6 REPEAT ALARM .........................................................................................................................15
4.7 DEAD-MAN ALARM AND FIRE ALARM ......................................................................................15
5 SET-UP MENU............................................................................................................................15
5.1 LAMP TEST.................................................................................................................................15
5.2 CONFIGURATION .......................................................................................................................15
6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ..........................................................................................................16
6.1 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS ................................................................................................16
6.2 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ......................................................................................................16

Document No.: T61201 Rev. No.: A0


File No.: T61201A0.doc Page 2 of 16
Extension Alarm System Damatic DNA
User Manual Marine System

1 General
1.1 Purpose
The purpose of this document is to provide the Users of the EAS panels with basic knowledge on how
the system works and is operated.
1.2 Target Groups
The document is aimed for following target groups:
• Users of the EAS panels.
1.3 Document Storage
This document is stored under: V:\Product_pub\Documents\T61201A0.doc
1.4 Document Responsible
Product Manager is responsible for this document.
1.5 Related Documents
T60901 EAS Panel Data Sheet
1.6 Document History
Rev Description of change Reason for Change

A0 This is the first issue.

1.7 Definitions

1.7.1 Abbreviations
EAS Extension Alarm System, a network of panels providing a remote view to the alarm state
in Damatic DNA.
UMS Unmanned Machinery Space (E0)
ECR Engine Control Room
WH Wheel House
1.7.2 Definition of Expressions

Document No.: T61201 Rev. No.: A0


File No.: T61201A0.doc Page 3 of 16
Extension Alarm System Damatic DNA
User Manual Marine System

2 Introduction
2.1 Basic functionality
The EAS system is a set of local alarm panels (EAS panels) to be distributed in different areas onboard
ships. The areas will typically be Engine Control Room (ECR), Wheelhouse (WH), engineers/officer’s
cabins and public areas like mess room etc. The panels are connected together on a common
communication line, which is connected to and controlled by Damatic DNA.

The main function of the EAS panel is to extend alarm indication from the control rooms to other
areas onboard the ship. Providing indication, no alarms can be acknowledged from a panel. Other
important functions are:

• UMS mode alarm handling


• Non-UMS mode alarm handling
• Transfer of responsibility
• Browsing of alarm list in clear text
• Ability to sort alarms by group, and to mask inactive alarms
• Assist Call between panels
• Indication of Dead-man alarm for machinery spaces
• Indication of Fire alarm

When not set in UMS mode, all alarms are distributed to all panels as text. Also group alarm
information is displayed. Group alarm information is the name of the alarm group in clear text,
number of unacknowledged alarms and number of active alarms that has been acknowledged within
each group. No acoustic signals or acknowledge logic is used in this mode for alarm handling. Fire
Alarm indication and Dead-man alarm indication will be indicated with acoustic signals also in non-
UMS mode.

2.2 Front panel layout


Figure 1 displays an EAS panel. It features a huge backlit LCD, LED status indicators and clearly
marked function buttons. The user operates the panel through menus on the screen and function
buttons below the screen area.

Document No.: T61201 Rev. No.: A0


File No.: T61201A0.doc Page 4 of 16
Extension Alarm System Damatic DNA
User Manual Marine System

Figure 1: Wall-mounted EAS panel

Figure 2 is a figurative illustration of an EAS panel with descriptions of the different elements that are
visible in the front. This kind of stylised drawing will be used throughout this document to clearly
show example situations on the panels.

1
2
MAIN MENU Chief engineer
Unack Ack  POWER
All Alarms 0 0
 REPEAT AL

3
 ON DUTY

4
 EAS ALARM
5
17  FIRE ALARM
6
 DEAD MAN
7
Alarm Groups Setup
 ASSIST CALL
8

16 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 Home Cancel
10

Assist 
call
Dimmer
  Enter ACKN 11

15 12
14 13

Figure 2: Front panel controls and indicators

Document No.: T61201 Rev. No.: A0


File No.: T61201A0.doc Page 5 of 16
Extension Alarm System Damatic DNA
User Manual Marine System

The table describes the functions of the indicator LEDs and buttons in Figure 2.

LED Indications
Ref Name Colour Function
1 Power Green Being software-controlled, this indicator will
indicator also confirm that the firmware is running in
the internal micro controller
2 Failure Red Indicates a problem with the communication
indicator or operating environment of the panel (wrong
voltage, high temperature)
3 Repeat alarm Red Lit if the current alarm is a repeat alarm
indicator
4 On duty Yellow Indicates that the panel is set on duty
indicator
5 EAS alarm Red Indicates that there are active alarms in the
indicator alarm groups that Damatic DNA is
configured to send to this panel
6 Fire alarm Red Indicates active fire alarm
indicator
7 Dead man Red Indicated dead man alarm
indicator
8 Assist call Red Indicates that this panel participates in an
indicator active assist call session
Buttons
Ref Name Function
9 Home button Brings up the main picture of the panel screen
10 Cancel button
11 ACKN button Silences acoustic signal locally and acknowledge Assist Call
functions.
12 Enter button
13 Arrow Used for selecting and scrolling data on the screen
buttons
14 Dimmer Adjusts the intensity of the screen backlight and indicator LED
button in 16 steps
15 Assist call Brings up the menu for the assist call function
button
16 [S1]-[S6] Used for operation of menus on the screen. Functions will
function keys change on different menus, corresponding to the bottom line of
the display
Screen
Ref Name
17 Main screen Alphanumeric This is the main indicator on the panel. Will
LCD with display information about alarms, explain
backlight failures and provide a menu system for the
user to navigate through

In addition, a piezoelectric buzzer hidden behind the front panel serves as an acoustic indicator.

Document No.: T61201 Rev. No.: A0


File No.: T61201A0.doc Page 6 of 16
Extension Alarm System Damatic DNA
User Manual Marine System

2.3 The display


The function keys S1 through S6 are used for selecting functions from the menu line at the bottom of
the LCD. This menu line will change when the user navigates in the menu hierarchy.

Figure 3: EAS panel screen close-up

The LCD backlight (Figure 3) will decrease its brightness after a period of inactivity (adjustable), until
a user or system event restores the brightness level.

The activity brightness level can be adjusted with the Dimmer button. The contrast of the LCD can be
configured on the set-up menu (section 5.2), and is temperature compensated to stay at the given set
point.

2.4 Panel network


All panels onboard are connected to Damatic DNA through a common serial bus. All the panels are
identical with regards to construction and software, but are configured during installation to have the
desired behaviour for different locations.

From Damatic DNA

Wheelhouse Public room Officer cabin Engine


control room

Figure 4: EAS panel network


Document No.: T61201 Rev. No.: A0
File No.: T61201A0.doc Page 7 of 16
Extension Alarm System Damatic DNA
User Manual Marine System

There can be up to 31 panels connected to this network. Figure 4 is a principle sketch of the
connection logic. In reality this network is built with isolating repeaters and might even have star
topology. Please refer to your system documentation for more detail about your installation.

2.5 Operating modes


During installation, each panel is configured to operate according to the expectations for its location.
The wheelhouse and ECR panels will have somewhat different functionality than accommodation
panels, and public space panels will be even more limited.

 Because of this there are minor differences in the available menus between some panels, but
not more than we can handle in a common user manual. Expect your panel to have minor
differences in menus and screen pictures from what you see in this manual.

As a result of this design, it is possible to replace a faulty panel with a reconfigured panel from a less
important location.

Document No.: T61201 Rev. No.: A0


File No.: T61201A0.doc Page 8 of 16
Extension Alarm System Damatic DNA
User Manual Marine System

3 Software panel in ECR


In some installations, the ECR panel has been replaced with a software panel in a Damatic DNA
mimic. This software panel is not identical in function to the real panels, for instance is the real alarm
list already available to the operator in the Damatic DNA mimics. The software panel has the
following functions:

• Panel network monitoring


• Transfer of responsibility control and monitoring/UMS-mode activation
• Assist call initiation (cannot receive assist call requests)
• Set panels on duty

The typical appearance of the software panel is illustrated in Figure 5 below. Its appearance may have
project-specific adjustments.

Figure 5: Software panel appearance

This document describes the real EAS panels unless otherwise stated in a context.

Document No.: T61201 Rev. No.: A0


File No.: T61201A0.doc Page 9 of 16
Extension Alarm System Damatic DNA
User Manual Marine System

4 Panel menus and screens


4.1 Home/main
The home screen is the main picture of the EAS panels. This is where the panel automatically settles
after power-on or if it has not been used for a while. The home screen can be identified by the ‘MAIN
MENU’ indication in the upper part of the picture.

‘MAIN MENU’
indication Panel id/location

MAIN MENU Chief engineer


Unack Ack  POWER
All Alarms 0 0
 REPEAT AL

 ON DUTY

 EAS ALARM

 FIRE ALARM

 DEAD MAN

Alarm Groups Setup


 ASSIST CALL

S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 Home Cancel

Assist 
call
Dimmer
  Enter ACKN

This picture gives an overview of the current situation and events, such as number of alarms, assist
call traffic and UMS mode.

4.2 Failure indication


Any failure in the panel is indicated with the failure lamp (Figure 2, item 2) along with a description
on the panel screen.

4.3 Alarms
When there are alarms in the EAS panel that are not acknowledged, the Alarm LED is steady ON.
When all alarms are acknowledged in Damatic DNA, the Alarm LED is OFF, independent of any
active alarms. Number of unacknowledged and active alarms in each alarm group is to be available in
the EAS panels. The active and unacknowledged alarms in clear text according to Damatic DNA
alarm list, can be browsed from all the EAS panels

Alarms may have four different states. The EAS panels will display alarms that have not reached the
last possible state (Figure 6).

Document No.: T61201 Rev. No.: A0


File No.: T61201A0.doc Page 10 of 16
Extension Alarm System Damatic DNA
User Manual Marine System

(appear) (disappear)

Active,
acknowledged

Active, Inactive,
unacknowledged acknowledged

Inactive,
unacknowledged

Figure 6: Possible alarm states

Alarms are removed when entering the last state, inactive and acknowledged. The EAS panels are not
allowed to change the state of any alarms, only view the current situation.

An audible alarm will be activated on the panels that are on duty, or on the responsible panel in UMS
mode. All other panels will be in indication-only mode.

4.3.1 Alarm groups transmitted from Damatic DNA


All Damatic DNA alarm groups are typically copied directly to the EAS panels, but in some
installations these groups may be mapped to other alarm groups in the EAS panels. Both systems can
handle up to 64 alarm groups.

 Be aware that this kind of mapping allows masking of entire alarm groups on the EAS panels.

Please refer to your system manual for information about how the Damatic DNA alarm groups are
mapped to the EAS alarm groups in your installation.

4.3.2 Home picture


The main menu provides information about the total number of unacknowledged and acknowledged
alarms in the system area the panel belongs to. The wheelhouse panel will show the alarm data for
each system individually and a summary for all systems.

4.3.3 Local acknowledge


To temporarily inhibit the audible alarm on an EAS panel, press the ACKN button. The panel display
returns to the main menu. This only applies to panels that are on duty or UMS responsible.

Locally acknowledging an alarm on a panel will not influence the actual alarm in Damatic DNA, but it
will stop the audible alarm on all panels that are on duty until the repeat alarm is trigged or another
alarm is received. The alarm must be acknowledged in Damatic DNA to really be acknowledged and
disappear from the alarm list.

If the alarm is not acknowledged in a control room within timeout, which is normally 330s, a repeat
alarm is automatically issued on all panels. Repeat alarm requires local acknowledge on all panels.

Document No.: T61201 Rev. No.: A0


File No.: T61201A0.doc Page 11 of 16
Extension Alarm System Damatic DNA
User Manual Marine System

4.3.4 Alarm list


Select ‘Alarm’ (S1) from the main menu to display the alarm list.

All Alarms
 POWER
314.011 WNC.HY.UNIT1 EX.O.TK MEAS. > HL
314.012 WNC.HY.UNIT1 OIL TMP MEAS. > HL  REPEAT AL
314.009 WNC.HY.UNIT2 PUMP 4 MEAS. > HL
314.007 WNC.HY.UNIT2
314.008 WNC.HY.UNIT2
PUMP 2
PUMP 3
MEAS.
MEAS.
>
>
HL
HL
 ON DUTY

END OF LIST
 EAS ALARM

 FIRE ALARM

 DEAD MAN

PgDwn PgUp Comp Time Groups All


 ASSIST CALL

S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 Home Cancel

Assist 
call
Dimmer
  Enter ACKN

Figure 7: EAS panel displaying alarm list

The default view of the alarm list displays tagname and alarm text information for the alarms. If the
‘END OF LIST’ indicator is not visible, there are more alarms active than there is room for in this
display area. Please refer to paragraph 4.3.7 for information about scrolling.

Active alarms are indicated with an asterisk (‘*’) in the absolute left of each alarm list entry. If the
alarm is inactive, this character is replaced by a whitespace.

4.3.5 View alarms from a single group


To view alarms from a single group only, select ‘Groups’ (S5) from the main menu or the alarm list
picture. Use the up/down arrow keys to move the cursor to your desired EAS alarm group, and press
‘Alarms’ (S1) to select. The header field in the alarm list picture will display the name of the alarm
group currently viewed.

To go back to viewing alarms in all groups, select ‘All’ (S6) in the alarm list picture.

If you go back to the main menu in the home picture, the alarm list will automatically go back to
displaying all alarms the next time it is entered.

4.3.6 Compress/Expand function


By selecting ‘Comp’ (S3) in the alarm list picture, you can set the panel to display only
unacknowledged alarms. The S3 menu choice changes to ‘Expand’.

Go back to displaying all alarms by selecting ‘Expand’ (S3).

Document No.: T61201 Rev. No.: A0


File No.: T61201A0.doc Page 12 of 16
Extension Alarm System Damatic DNA
User Manual Marine System

4.3.7 Timestamp and scrolling


Use the left/right arrow keys to scroll the alarm list entries sideways and display more information.

Select ‘Time’ (S4) to enable the timestamp field (date and time) of each alarm. This field is not
displayed by default. The timestamp is the origin time from Damatic DNA, and does not indicate
when the panel received the alarm.

Use the up/down arrow keys to scroll the alarm list up and down one line at a time. Use ‘PgDwn’
(page down, S1) and ‘PgUp’ (page up, S2) functions to move quickly up and down the list one page at
a time.

4.4 Assist Call


The EAS panels offer ‘assist call’ functionality as means of secondary or emergency communication
onboard. It is possible to call specific panels by name/location, or to call all other panels
simultaneously.

 It is not possible for software panels to receive assist calls, unless there are extra alarms outlets
installed using Damatic DNA I/O cards. Again, check with the documentation for your
installation.

To call a specific panel, select Assist call and the ‘Select’ (S3). Use the up/down arrow keys to select
which panel to call, and press ‘Send’ (S1) to send the request (Figure 8).

SELECT RECEIVER
 POWER
All Wheelhouse
ECR Chief engineer  REPEAT AL
1. engineer 2. engineer
3. engineer  ON DUTY

 EAS ALARM

 FIRE ALARM

 DEAD MAN

Send
 ASSIST CALL

S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 Home Cancel

Assist 
call
Dimmer
  Enter ACKN

Figure 8: Select where to send assist call request

Once the request has been sent, the panel returns to the assist call picture to display the status of
ongoing calls (Figure 9). The assist call picture on the EAS panels displays the status of earlier and
current calls, outbound and externally, on the far right end of each line.

Document No.: T61201 Rev. No.: A0


File No.: T61201A0.doc Page 13 of 16
Extension Alarm System Damatic DNA
User Manual Marine System

CALL
ASSIST CALL
 POWER
Last Calls From this Panel: Status
Outbound Chief engineer - All Wait  REPEAT AL

History of Calls:
 ON DUTY

1. engineer - Wheelhouse Ackn


External  EAS ALARM

 FIRE ALARM

 DEAD MAN
Call
All Clear Select
 ASSIST CALL

S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 Home Cancel

Assist 
call
Dimmer
  Enter ACKN

Figure 9: Assist call history picture

Wait Damatic DNA has not handled your request for an assist call
message yet. Please wait, the panel software will automatically
retry.
Unack Damatic DNA has relayed the request, but it has not been answered
in the other end yet.
Ackn The other party has answered the request. If you called all other
panels, you get this status as soon as one of them has answered.
Clear The assist call request was withdrawn before it was answered.

The assist call LED is flashing as long as there are active assist call sessions in the system. Go to the
main/home menu in this mode, and an indication will remain active in top of the display. Receiving
the ‘ACKN’ status on an assist call is accompanied by an audible alarm.

Assist calls to individual panels can be routed to Damatic DNA I/O cards as an extra feature. This
allows the installation of auxiliary audible and/or visual indicators for assist calls.

4.5 Transfer of Responsibility / UMS mode


When the users want to enter the UMS mode, the responsibility must be transferred from ECR to WH
using the EAS panels in ECR and WH. Transfer without pre-selection of duty engineer(s) will
generate a transfer warning. This warning will not go away before an engineer is selected on duty.
The selection of duty engineer(s) is done through Damatic DNA Operator Station.

Selecting “Transfer Responsibility to WH” mode from ECR panel starts transfer request. An
indication in the WH and ECR panels is shown as a blinking “On Duty” LED and an acoustic signal.
The WH can accept the transfer, and by that entering UMS mode. “On Duty” LED will be steady ON
in WH and OFF in ECR. If the WH does not accept the transfer or the requests times-out, a transfer
warning is generated and the transfer is not done.

When the EAS is in UMS mode, the WH panel will audibly indicate all alarms.

Document No.: T61201 Rev. No.: A0


File No.: T61201A0.doc Page 14 of 16
Extension Alarm System Damatic DNA
User Manual Marine System

One or several duty engineers must be selected to cover all the alarm groups. One engineer can be
selected to more than one alarm group.

To leave the UMS mode, a transfer of responsibility from WH to ECR must be made from the EAS
panel in ECR.

4.6 Repeat Alarm


When the EAS is in UMS mode, engineers are required to acknowledge alarms at the operator station
in ECR within the timeout of the repeat alarm delay. This delay is normally set to 330s during
installation.

Failing to acknowledge the alarm in ECR will eventually result in a repeat alarm indication on all
panels in the same system.

4.7 Dead-man Alarm and Fire Alarm


Dead-man and Fire Alarms are indicated on the panels with LEDs, audible alarm and a message on the
display. The sound of the audible alarm will have a different pitch than regular EAS alarms. These
alarms are controlled from Damatic DNA, and cannot be locally acknowledged but will remain active
until they are cleared.

These alarms may also appear in the alarm list window if Damatic DNA alarms are trigged by the
same event that trigged the signal to the panels.

5 Set-up menu
5.1 Lamp test
The set-up menu (S6 from main menu) offers a lamp test on the S2 button. It will activate all LEDs
and the buzzer for as long as it is held down.

5.2 Configuration
The configuration menu (S1) presents a list of configurable parameters. Some of them are password
protected, the rest are user-configurable.

RS485 address 0x01 – 0x20 Panel identifier, 0x0 is reserved Protected


Max time 0x00 – 0xFF Channel status timeout Protected
comunic
Retransmit 0x00 – 0xFF Retry timeout Protected
timeout
Number of 0x00 – 0xFF Retries before local alarm Protected
retries
Baudrate 9600 – 38400 Serial line communication speed Protected
LCD contrast 00 – FF Display contrast set-point Configurable

To change a setting, use the ‘Inc+’ and ‘Dec-‘ buttons (S1, S2). If the setting is protected, enter the
password using the values of the function keys, and close with Enter. Protected settings are not meant
to be altered by the end user.

Document No.: T61201 Rev. No.: A0


File No.: T61201A0.doc Page 15 of 16
Extension Alarm System Damatic DNA
User Manual Marine System

6 System description
6.1 Electrical characteristics
Power supply: 24VDC
Serial line: 4-wire RS485, multi-dropped and electrically isolated.
6.2 Additional information
For additional information about type approvals and electrical and physical characteristics, please see
the EAS panel Data Sheet.

Document No.: T61201 Rev. No.: A0


File No.: T61201A0.doc Page 16 of 16
VALMARINE

Dead Man System


VALMARINE
G
General
l
The Dead Man System
System, also called “Engineer
Engineer Safety System
System”, is a safety system used by the
”engineer(s) on duty”, when the vessel is sailing in unattended machine space mode.

The system can be activated at any time, from a start panel, usually placed outside the ECR entry door,
or automatically from the Damatic system,
system when the EAS (Extended Alarm System) is on and a new
alarm is detected.
Activation of the system will immediately start a pre-
pre- warning timer. The timer has normally a delay
from 15 to 25 minutes (adjustable from the Damatic keyboard)
keyboard).
The timer can be reset whenever it is wanted from a ECR panel or from Reset Panels, placed in the
ER.
A resett off th
the ti
timer means that
th t the
th ti
timer starts
t t ffor a new ffull
ll period.
i d
NOTE. The timer will continue to run even after the engineer has accepted the alarm from the Damatic
System.

When the time has elapsed, the system will create a “pre warning alarm”. This is an internal alarm to
the engineer, working in the ECR or ER, telling that he must reset the timer for a new period, within 3
to 5 minutes (adjustable from the Damatic key board), if not, the Dead Man Alarm will be activated at
the bridge ( Bridge Panel ) and also in the Damatic System.
System
To release the dead man alarm, push reset. from the Start Panel by switching the key ON and OFF.
If the system has been started automatically, the key in the Start Panel must be switched ON and OFF
to switch to switch off.

2
VALMARINE
P
Panels
l

BRIDGE PANEL.
11. ON Indication lamp.
lamp Indicate that the system is on.
on
2. ALARM Dead Man Alarm indication lamp.( lamp and buzzer)
3. TEST Test push button (testing lamps and horn)
4. BZ OFF Turns off the Dead Man Alarm .

3
VALMARINE
P
Panels
l
ECR PANEL.
1. ON Indication lamp. Indicate that the system is on.
2 ALARM
2. D dM
Dead Man Al
Alarm iindication
di ti lamp.(
l ( lamp
l andd buzzer)
b )
3. TEST Test push button (testing lamps and horn)
4. RESET Reset Pre-warning timer .

4
VALMARINE
P
Panels
l
START PANEL.
1. ON/TEST Indication lamp. Indicate that the system is on,testing lamps.
2. PREWARN Pre warning indication lamp
3. START Manual start/stop key.

5
VALMARINE
P
Panels
l

ER RESET PANEL.
1. PREWARN/RESET Pre-warming
i indication
i di i lamp
l andd Reset bush
b h button
b
2. ON/TEST On indication lamp and Test bush button.

6
ECR PANEL

S t off.Chose
System ff Ch one engineer
i on duty
d t
ECR PANEL
Give watch responsibility to WH.
WH PANEL

Accept responsibility transfer


WH PANEL

Watch responsibility is transferred to WH


CABIN

ON DUTY
ACCOMONDATION ROOMS
WH PANEL

Incoming alarm
CABIN

Cabin alarm
ACCOMONDATION ROOMS
WH PANEL

REPEAT ALARM
WH PANEL

Alarm accepted from Damatic keyboard


MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DAMATIC DNA

Document id: T60001


Project No:
Rev. Issue date Reason for issue Issued by Checked Approved

A0 01.05.02 First issue JPN LES OAJ


A1 14.06.02 LES PS OAJ

A2 04.02.04 Updated with ACN and DNA PC LES PS OAJ

File No.: T60001A2.doc Page 1 of 18


MAINTENANCE MANUAL Damatic DNA
Marine System

Section Table Of Contents Page

GENERAL ..............................................................................................................................................4
PURPOSE...............................................................................................................................................4
TARGET GROUPS ..................................................................................................................................4
DOCUMENT STORAGE ..........................................................................................................................4
DOCUMENT RESPONSIBLE ...................................................................................................................4
RELATED DOCUMENTS ........................................................................................................................4
DOCUMENT HISTORY ...........................................................................................................................4
DEFINITIONS.........................................................................................................................................4
Abbreviations...................................................................................................................................4
Definition of Expressions ................................................................................................................4
1 MAINTENANCE ROUTINES.....................................................................................................5

2 FANS AND VENTILATION........................................................................................................6


2.1 ABOUT FILTERS ...........................................................................................................................6
2.2 EXTERIOR CABINET FANS (DOOR, SIDE, OR ROOF OF CABINETS)................................................6
2.3 RACK FAN FOR STATIONS IN SYSTEM CABINET ..........................................................................6
2.4 I/O CABINET STANDARD RACK FAN ...........................................................................................7
2.5 MINI/MIDI RACK FANS ................................................................................................................7
2.6 DNA PC STATIONS FILTER AND FAN ..........................................................................................7
2.7 ACN FAN AND FILTER .................................................................................................................8
2.7.1 Replacing the ACN filter ....................................................................................................8
2.7.2 Changing the ACN fan........................................................................................................8
3 BATTERIES ................................................................................................................................10
3.1 GENERAL ABOUT BATTERIES ....................................................................................................10
3.2 REPLACEMENT OF BATTERIES ...................................................................................................10
3.2.1 How to replace SPU Battery ............................................................................................10
3.2.2 How to replace SPUC Battery..........................................................................................10
3.2.3 How to replace FPUS Battery. .........................................................................................11
4 POWER SUPPLIES INDICATORS .........................................................................................12
4.1 VPU INDICATOR LIGHTS ...........................................................................................................12
4.2 VPU2 INDICATOR LIGHTS .........................................................................................................12
4.3 FPUS INDICATOR LIGHTS ..........................................................................................................12
4.4 IPU / IPU2 INDICATOR LIGHTS .................................................................................................12
4.5 SPU ...........................................................................................................................................12
4.6 SPUC INDICATOR LIGHTS .........................................................................................................13
5 OTHER EQUIPMENT INDICATOR LIGHT.........................................................................14
5.1 ACN INDICATOR LIGHTS ...........................................................................................................14
5.2 DNA PC STATION INDICATOR LIGHTS ......................................................................................14
6 MONITORS (VDUS) ..................................................................................................................15
6.1 TFT (THIN FILM TRANSISTOR) – MONITOR. ............................................................................15
6.1.1 Cleaning ...........................................................................................................................15
6.2 CRT (CATHODE -RAY TUBE) – MONITOR. ...............................................................................15
6.2.1 Cleaning ...........................................................................................................................15

Doc.No.: T60001 Rev. No.: A2


File No.: T60001A2.doc Page 2 of 18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL Damatic DNA
Marine System

7 OPERATING TERMINALS, KEYBOARDS AND TRACKER BALLS..............................15


7.1 CLEANING OF OPERATING TERMINALS AND QWERTY-KEYBOARDS ......................................15
7.2 CLEANING OF TOUCH SCREEN ON THE OPERATING TERMINAL.................................................15
7.3 CLEANING OF TRACKER BALL AND MOUSE...............................................................................15
8 EXTENSION ALARM SYSTEM (EAS) PANELS ..................................................................15
8.1 CLEANING OF EAS PANELS ......................................................................................................15
9 PRINTERS...................................................................................................................................16
9.1 MATRIX PRINTERS .....................................................................................................................16
9.1.1 Cleaning ...........................................................................................................................16
9.2 LASER / INKJET PRINTER ...........................................................................................................16
9.2.1 Cleaning and Maintenance...............................................................................................16
10 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS ........................................................................................17
10.1 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS.............................................................................................17
GENERAL CONDITIONS .................................................................................................................18

Doc.No.: T60001 Rev. No.: A2


File No.: T60001A2.doc Page 3 of 18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL Damatic DNA
Marine System

General
Purpose
The purpose of this document is to guide the users and maintenance personnel of Damatic DNA
systems through correct maintenance procedures.
Target Groups
The document is aimed for following target groups:
Operators and maintenance personnel of Damatic DNA
Document Storage
This document is stored under: V:\Product_pub\Documents\T60001A2.doc
Document Responsible
Product & Technology Manager is responsible for this document.
Related Documents

Document History
Rev Description of change Reason for Change

A0 This is the first issue.


A1 First release issue
A2 Updated with ACN and DNA PC Stations
Definitions

Abbreviations
Definition of Expressions

Doc.No.: T60001 Rev. No.: A2


File No.: T60001A2.doc Page 4 of 18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL Damatic DNA
Marine System

1 Maintenance Routines
To ensure reliable and correct operation the following recommendations are made for regular
maintenance:

Maintenance intervals in the table:

A- Every 1 Month.
B- Every 6 Month
C- Every 2 years or during dry-dock
D- According to class authorities and regulations

Maintenance Action A B C D
Do a visual inspection off all the fans installed. Also check that they are running X
properly and without noise from the bearings.
Replace or clean all ventilation filters. (In areas with high level of dust, shorter X
maintenance intervals may prove to be necessary).
Verify fault and power indicators on all the power supplies. X
(All VPU, VPU2, IPU and FPUS units in the system are equipped with LED
indicators for this purpose).
Test the functionality of the Dead man alarm system (safety). (X) X
Clean the keyboards and tracker balls X
Clean the VDU's X
EAS Extension Alarm System should be given a full functional test, including (X) (X) X
alarm buzzers and indicators in the ECR, WH, cabins and dayrooms.
The condition of all the batteries should be tested at least every 6-month. A label X (X)
with the date of the last test is recommended to be put on front of the battery unit
after each test. Alternatively this work may be performed by the BTMU (Battery
Test and Monitoring Unit) units, which continuously monitors the capacity of
the batteries and alarms the operator of any irregularity.
Batteries should be replaced et least every 4-year.
Clean printers X
Visually inspect all cables and connectors inside the cabinets. Pay special X
attention to the connectors on the back of the swing frames. (Check for loose or
misalign plugs and connectors.)
Conductivity of all bus cables should be measured and connectors with bad X
contacts should be changed
Calibrate level transmitters for tank level gauging X
Calibrate signal converters for important feedback and control signals to/from X
Damatic DNA
Vacuum / brush cleaning of cards and components if necessary. X
NOTE: Anti-static precautions to be taken when handling electronic
components. Use only dried pressurised air or anti-static controlled equipment
for the cleaning job.
Check of system diagnostic sensors by CAE Valmarine engineer to reveal if X
there is any abnormal behaviour in the system. (A more extensive diagnostic
check than reported via ordinary diagnostic alarms in the alarm list.)

Doc.No.: T60001 Rev. No.: A2


File No.: T60001A2.doc Page 5 of 18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL Damatic DNA
Marine System

2 Fans and ventilation


2.1 About filters
Filters could be cleaned using pressurized air or washed with an ordinary household detergent if
nothing else is noted for each of the equipment.
2.2 Exterior Cabinet fans (door, side, or roof of cabinets)
The condition of the fan units should be examined at the same time as the filter servicing.
The cleaning or replacement interval of the dust filter depends on the existing dust conditions. The
nature and amount of the dust affects filter clogging. The degree of clogging can be inspected visually
from colour changes in the filter. Do a visual inspection of all the fans installed and check that they are
running properly without noise from the bearings.

2.3 Rack fan for stations in System Cabinet


The condition of the fan units should be examined at the same time as the filter servicing.
The cleaning or replacement interval of the dust filter depends on the existing dust conditions. The
nature and amount of the dust affects filter clogging. The degree of clogging can be inspected visually
from colour changes in the filter. Do a visual inspection of all the fans installed and check that they are
running properly without noise from the bearings.

Doc.No.: T60001 Rev. No.: A2


File No.: T60001A2.doc Page 6 of 18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL Damatic DNA
Marine System

2.4 I/O Cabinet Standard Rack fan


The fan does not have filter. The condition of the fan units is examined by checking that all fan units
are running.
Do a visual check inspection off all the fans installed and check they are running properly without
noise from the bearings.

2.5 Mini/Midi rack fans


The fan does not have filter. The condition of the fan units is examined by checking that all fan units
are running.
Do a visual check inspection off all the fans installed and check they are running properly without
noise from the bearings.

2.6 DNA PC Stations filter and fan


The filter for the DNA PC Stations is placed in the front of the unit. Slide the filter to the right to
remove the filter. This filter must be replaced with a new filter of the same type.
The fans are located behind the filter and in the power supply (rear of the DNA PC Station). Check
that the fans are running.

Doc.No.: T60001 Rev. No.: A2


File No.: T60001A2.doc Page 7 of 18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL Damatic DNA
Marine System

2.7 ACN fan and filter


The need to replace the fan and/or filter is done by visual inspection or indicated by the internal
temperature of the ACN, which is monitored through the Damatic DNA system. An alarm will be
raised if temperature is too high in any ACN station. If the internal temperature begins to rise, the filter
should be replaced immediately. If the filter is cleaned or replacing the filter does not help, replace the
fan.
2.7.1 Replacing the ACN filter
To replace the ACN filter, pull out the filter carriage, replace the filter and push the carriage back into
place.

The filter system is located on the left on the ACN front panel. Open the front panel and pull the filter
carriage directly out.
Pull the filter out of the carriage. Replace it with a new filter and return the carriage back to the case.

2.7.2 Changing the ACN fan


In continuous use, the estimated lifespan of the centrifugal fan with a ball bearing included in the
pressurized filtering system of ACN is 50,000 hours (approximately 6 years).
The fan is to be replaced if its efficiency is significantly reduced indicated by frequent temperature
alarm. Accumulation of dust inside the ACN cabinet is also and indication of the need for fan
replacement. A change in the sound of the fan is often the first sign of fan breakdown.

The fan is changed according to the following figures.

Doc.No.: T60001 Rev. No.: A2


File No.: T60001A2.doc Page 8 of 18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL Damatic DNA
Marine System

Fan carriage is in the rear of the filter carriage. Remove first the filter carriage by pulling it directly
out.

Turn the fan carriage quick–locking screw approximately half turn counter–clockwise, after which the
fan with the carriage can be removed from the case by pulling it directly out.

Doc.No.: T60001 Rev. No.: A2


File No.: T60001A2.doc Page 9 of 18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL Damatic DNA
Marine System

3 Batteries
We recommend that batteries be replaced every 4th year, even if there is no fault indication.

3.1 General about batteries


The characteristics of sealed lead-acid batteries used in Damatic DNA power supplies are the same as
lead-acid batteries in general. The operating life at 25deg/C is approximately 6 years. A 10deg/C rise
in temperature will reduce the battery lifetime to approx. that half.
For systems equipped with Battery monitoring units, a capacity test of the batteries is automatically
done every month or 3rd month (programmable at the BTMU mounted inside the cabinets).

Battery used in SPU 2x 12V 28Ah.


Battery used in SPUC 2x 12V 38Ah.
Battery used in FPUS: 2x 12V 7.2Ah.
3.2 Replacement of batteries
CAE Valmarine recommend replacement of the batteries after four years, even if the capacity test is
OK.
3.2.1 How to replace SPU Battery
The VPUs connected to the SPU is normally in the same swing frame.

First check on all VPUs in the swing frame:


1. Check all VPU Main Power switches to be in ON (1) position. Green lamp in switch is on.
2. Check “Mains” LED for all VPU to be on

Then, for the SPU:


1. Switch off the battery switch in the front of the SPU
2. Disconnect the power plug in the front of the SPU (X1)
3. Unscrew the four screws in the front of the SPU and pull it out of the swing frame
4. Take off the top cover of the cassette (8 screws to be unscrewed)
5. Replace the batteries with new and fully charged batteries
6. Close top cover and fit SPU back in to the swing frame
7. Connect X1 plug and switch on battery switch on SPU
3.2.2 How to replace SPUC Battery
The VPU2s connected to the SPUC is normally in the same swing frame.

First check on all VPU2s in the swing frame:


1. Check all VPU2 Main Power switches to be in ON (1) position. Green lamp in switch is on.
2. Check “MAINS” LED for all VPU2 to be on

Then, for the SPUC:


1. Switch off the Mains and Output switch in the front of the SPUC to 0 position
2. Disconnect all plugs in the rear of the SPUC
3. Unscrew the four screws in the front of the SPUC and pull it out of the swing frame
4. Unscrew screws and take off the top cover
5. Replace the batteries with new and fully charged batteries

Doc.No.: T60001 Rev. No.: A2


File No.: T60001A2.doc Page 10 of 18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL Damatic DNA
Marine System

6. Close top cover and fit SPUC back in to the swing frame
7. Connect all plugs and switch on Mains and Output switches to 1 position

3.2.3 How to replace FPUS Battery.

When replacing battery in FPUS do as follows:

1. Confirm that Main power is on (green light on the “Mains” switch, in I position)
2. Switch off the battery switch in the front of the FPUS.
3. Unscrew the four screws in the front of the cassette (use a torch-driver T10).
4. Pull out the cassette.
5. Take off the top cover and replace the batteries with new and fully charged batteries
6. Fit top cover and fit battery cassette into FPUS again
7. Turn the battery switch on

Doc.No.: T60001 Rev. No.: A2


File No.: T60001A2.doc Page 11 of 18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL Damatic DNA
Marine System

4 Power Supplies indicators


4.1 VPU indicator lights
+5 V (Green) +5 V output voltage OK
+12 V (Green) +12 V output voltage OK
-12V (Green) -12 V output voltage OK
MAINS (Yellow) AC power supply in operation
AUX.DC (Yellow) Auxiliary DC supply connected to VPU

4.2 VPU2 indicator lights


+5 V (Green) +5 V output voltage OK
+12 V (Green) +12 V output voltage OK
-12V (Green) -12 V output voltage OK
MAINS (Yellow) VPU2 uses AC voltage supply. During a battery test, VPU2
uses the DC supply, but the MAINS indicator light is on
showing that the AC supply is connected and OK.
AUX.DC (Yellow) Auxiliary DC supply connected to VPU2

4.3 FPUS indicator lights


+28 V (Green) +28 V output voltage OK
MAINS (Yellow) AC supply to FPUS is OK.
BATTERY (Yellow) External DC supply connected from FPUS battery or
external DC source
DISCHARGED (Red) Battery Voltage < 19V

4.4 IPU / IPU2 indicator lights


+28 V (Green) +28 V (process voltage) supply to the back plane OK
+12 V (Green) +12 V output voltage OK
-12 V (Green) -12 V output voltage OK
+24 V (Green) +24 V output voltage > 22V
+5 V (Green) +12 V output voltage > 4.5V
F (Red) Unit is faulty

4.5 SPU
SPU do not have any indicator lights.

Doc.No.: T60001 Rev. No.: A2


File No.: T60001A2.doc Page 12 of 18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL Damatic DNA
Marine System

4.6 SPUC indicator lights


Besides a storage battery, the SPUC also includes a charging and monitoring unit BCU.

Indications for the conditions of the battery:

FC (Full Charge) (Green) The battery voltage has reached its compensating
charge voltage and the charging current has decreased
being under the battery-type specific limit.
CH (Charging) (Yellow) The battery is being charged, but the battery is not fully
charged yet.
DISCH (Discharging) (Yellow) The battery is being discharged. This indicator light will
come on, when the discharging current exceeds the level of 1
A approx. The indicator light also comes on when the battery
is not full and the charger does not function properly, since
in such a case the BCU's own power consumption discharges
the battery.
EB (Empty Battery) (Red) The battery is so empty that the deep discharge protection
has disconnected the DC output. The indicator light will go
out, when the battery voltage rises so much that the deep
discharge protection reconnects the DC supply. The indicator
light may be on for some time simultaneously with the
Charging indicator light.

Test indications (BCU part):


Test (Testing) (Yellow) A test is in progress. If the battery has not been full at the
beginning of the test, it is not possible to get any result, and
consequently the TEST indicator light will blink for the
duration of the test.
GOOD (Green) The battery is in a good order
IMP (Yellow) The battery has degraded
BAD (Red) Change the battery.

Doc.No.: T60001 Rev. No.: A2


File No.: T60001A2.doc Page 13 of 18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL Damatic DNA
Marine System

5 Other Equipment Indicator Light


5.1 ACN indicator lights
Power OK (Green) Supply voltage indicator. The light is on and steadies, when the power
is switched on.
5 VDC OK (green) Internal 5 V voltage indicator. The light is on and steady, when the
node is switched on and the internal 5 V voltage is OK.
Temp Alarm (Red) Overheating alarm indicator. The light flashes, when the temperature
inside the case exceeds a predetermined limit.
HDD (Yellow) Only if ACN is equipped with Hard Disc. When the disk is written to
or read from, the signal light flashes.
RUN (Green) ACN operating status indicator. When all ACN programs are active,
RUN is on and steady. On a redundant process control station, RUN is
only on for the active station.
SBY (Yellow) ACN operating status indicator. When one or several of the ACN
programs are passive, the SBY light is on and steady. SBY is always lit
on the passive station of a redundant process control station.
PB1 and PB2 (Yellow) System buses 1 and 2 status indicator. The signal light flashes in
accordance with the traffic volume, when the bus is connected and
there is traffic.
FB1 and FB2 (Yellow) Indicates the status of the I/O field buses 1 and 2.
The signal light is not on, if the bus is not connected.

5.2 DNA PC Station indicator lights


Power OK (Green) Supply voltage indicator. The light is on and steadies, when the power
is switched on.
HDD (Yellow) When the disk is written to or read from, the signal light flashes.

Doc.No.: T60001 Rev. No.: A2


File No.: T60001A2.doc Page 14 of 18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL Damatic DNA
Marine System

6 Monitors (VDUs)
6.1 TFT (Thin Film Transistor) – Monitor.

6.1.1 Cleaning
The picture area is wiped with a cloth damped in washing agent and dried with lens paper/cloth.
The enclosure is wiped with a damped cloth.
6.2 CRT (Cathode -Ray Tube) – Monitor.

6.2.1 Cleaning
The picture tube is wiped with a cloth damped in washing agent and dried with lens paper/cloth.
The enclosure is wiped with a damped cloth.

7 Operating Terminals, Keyboards and Tracker balls


7.1 Cleaning of Operating Terminals and QWERTY-keyboards
The equipment must be switched off during the cleaning to ensure that this does not interfere with the
process control. It is recommendable that the equipment's user himself does the cleaning.
Washing agent should be water soluble that is suitable for cleaning rubber and plastic. Washing cloth
must be damp and washing solution must not get inside the equipment.
7.2 Cleaning of touch screen on the Operating Terminal
The transparent surface parts of the touch screen are made from acrylic resin. These parts should not
be cleaned with strong organic solvent , not even alcohol..
To remove dry dust and dust from the screen and the surfaces, first blow with clean air ( blowing
apparatus design for cleaning of optics can be used ) and then use brushes and cloth meant for the
cleaning of lenses. Use water soluble detergent to remove adhesive grease and dirty from the
screen surface, then dry the screen with a lens cloth.
7.3 Cleaning of Tracker ball and mouse
The ball surface is wiped with a slightly damped cloth.

8 Extension Alarm System (EAS) Panels


8.1 Cleaning of EAS Panels
Washing agent should be water soluble that is suitable for cleaning rubber and plastic. Washing cloth
must be damp and washing solution must not get inside the equipment.

Doc.No.: T60001 Rev. No.: A2


File No.: T60001A2.doc Page 15 of 18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL Damatic DNA
Marine System

9 Printers
9.1 Matrix printers

9.1.1 Cleaning
The enclosure is wiped with a damped cloth.
Set the printer offline (button marked "SEL" or "SELECT"), then turn the printer OFF and remove the
paper from the path. Open the access cover and remove the pull- up roller. Use a clean, dry cloth to
dust the area around the carriage shaft and platen. Be sure to remove any loose particles of paper.
Reinstall the pull- up roller assembly and close the access cover. Note: Never use solvents or strong
detergents on the cabinet they could damage the housing.

9.2 Laser / Inkjet printer

9.2.1 Cleaning and Maintenance.


The enclosure is wiped with a damped cloth. For cleaning inside see the printer user manual.

Doc.No.: T60001 Rev. No.: A2


File No.: T60001A2.doc Page 16 of 18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL Damatic DNA
Marine System

10 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
10.1 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS.
Observe the following instructions as closely as possible when handling the equipment:
• Handle the electronic units with care to avoid causing direct or latent damage, such as the
following:
• Disconnection of components
• Damage to protective tin or lacquer coating
• Stresses and breaks caused by bending
• Damage to components (e.g. crystal oscillators and hard disk drive) caused by shocks
or impacts
• Observe the commonly known handling rules to minimize the risks caused by static
electricity; use a grounding arrangement, grounded equipment and semiconducting surfaces at
the place of work; handle the plug-in units only by touching their front panel, edges, etc.
• Prevent the effects of harmful gases and dust on units (both operating and in store). A mixture
of clean water and isopropanol (mixing ratio: 70/30) is recommended for cleaning
contaminated circuit boards. After washing, the board should be dried carefully. Optional
cleaning media include "terpene"-based solvents. Make sure that no cleaning fluid is left on
contact surfaces or inside components.
• Plug-in units must be de-energized when connecting or disconnecting them. The instructions
for individual units may include alleviations to this rule.
• Be careful not to short-circuit any batteries and power capacitors in the equipment.
• Make sure that the cooling fans and air circulation in the equipment cabinets function as
planned.
• When packing equipment for transportation, do it carefully and observe the special
requirements of each piece of equipment.
• When a device has been brought from cold to warm temperature, do not connect power to the
device until any condensed moisture has evaporated.
• Any repairs of circuit boards must be carried out with correct methods and with care. It is
recommendable to use solder containing RMA-type flux. Multi-layered circuit boards should
only be repaired by persons trained for the purpose.
• Our product uses lead acid batteries. Please note that you are obliged by the authorities to
deliver exhausted lead acid batteries to a hazardous waste collecting place.

Doc.No.: T60001 Rev. No.: A2


File No.: T60001A2.doc Page 17 of 18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL Damatic DNA
Marine System

GENERAL CONDITIONS

1. CAE Valmarine is under no circumstances liable for any consequential damage to


personnel or material. Neither to loss of profit or any other consequential economic
loss.

2. The scheduled maintenance procedures in this Maintenance Manual are mandatory.


The maintenance shall be documented with date, work description and result (in case
of testing procedure).

3. If faults in the systems delivered from CAE Valmarine occur, and the scheduled
maintenance is not fulfilled, the system guarantee will not be valid.

4. CAE Valmarine is available for the system users regarding maintenance questions or
on-board assistance.

5. Questions regarding maintenance can be raised with our Customer Support


department.
Contact details Customer Support:
Phone office: (+47) 32218100
Fax office: (+47) 32826252
E-mail: customer.support@valmarine.no
Service tel. 24 hours: (+47) 90540973

Doc.No.: T60001 Rev. No.: A2


File No.: T60001A2.doc Page 18 of 18
VALMARINE

System Alarms/
Self Diagnostic
g Alarms
Ê Short description of the Self Diagnostic Alarms
Ê Server/Station ((VME)) Alarms
Ê Redundant PCS Alarms
Ê Control Room Network Alarms
Ê VME node Network Alarms
Ê IO and Rack Alarms
Ê Signal Faults
VALMARINE
D
Desc. off Di
Diagnostic
ti Alarms
Al

The DIAgnostic server (DIA) has a program installed used for debugging of the
automation system and to supervision of the system itself.

The metsoDNA system monitors its own operation continuously. When a fault
occurs an alarm is generated and displayed in the header
occurs, header'ss alarm area and on
the Alarm List.

When a system alarm occurs, the operator has to carry out any prearranged
actions and report them to the maintenance personnel as soon as possible.

In a redundantly configured system, with duplicated stations and system


bus, alarms (and messages) are generated separately for the main and standby
processor. This is also indicated in the alarm or message text.

2
Server/Station: Loss
VALMARINE
off M
Mains
i PWR

Alarm in Alarm List


*S
S AP01 MAIN
MAIN PCS ON BATTERY

Cause of alarm:
• Power failure
• Momentary overload; 220 V fuse on the station's power supply unit (VPU) has blown

Eff t
Effect:
• The station's power supply is provided by standby power unit (SPU) alone

• I approx. 30 minutes
In i t theth standby
t db power may also
l beb insufficient
i ffi i t to
t supportt the
th station
t ti

3
Server/Station: No conn. To the
VALMARINE
restt off th
the system
t

Alarm in Alarm List


*S
S A1O1 STATION NO RESPONSE
RESPONSE

Cause of alarm:
• The station's power supply unit (VPU) is faulty
• The station's
station s connection to system bus has failed
• Software fault
• The station is being serviced (without power)

Effect:
• Connection to the station is off; the station may be running in independent mode
• The station is not in operation

4
Server/Station:
VALMARINE
Station
St ti Has
H Started
St t d

Alarm in Alarm List


*S
S AL01 Station Has Started
*S AP01 Main PCS Has Started

If this is a PCS/LIS which is not provided with redundancy, all the related actuators and sequence
control programs will be in the manual mode. In addition, all setpoints, parameters and counters will be
from the last databackup value.
value The values of output signals are either zero or they have remained
unchanged, depending on whether the I/O rack's power has been on all the time or not.
The operator must then check all loops of the affected station and, if necessary, place the loops in the
automatic mode; he must also give them new setpoints and parameters if changed since last
databackup. The operator should also follow the factory-specific procedure if such has been specified.
The sequence step display shows the sequence status and steps (also indicating the currently active
step) as well as the conditions and actions for one step.
step), step
The OPS/ALP/DIA does not require special action except for checking the reason for it started now.

Note:
For a redundantly configured station the actions described above will be required only if both main and
reserve processor give a starting message.
5
VALMARINE
R d d t PCS Al
Redundant Alarms

Alarm in Alarm List


*S
S AP01 Reserve Station Not Up To Date

C
Cause off alarm:
l
• The configurations of the active and passive processor are different
• The update bus is faulty

Effect:
• If the active p
processor fails and operation
p is switched to the other processor,
p
all funct. (e.g. controllers and motor controls) are switched to the manual mode
• Operation is switched from active processor to passive processor only when the
processor fails. Switching
p g the processors
p for any
y other reason is prevented.
p

6
Control Room Network Alarms
VALMARINE
Switch
S it h Alarm
Al I
Th network
The t k alarms
l on the
th control
t l room side
id is
i created
t d by
b a program
called Netwatch. Netwatch is actually an activity (XDi=station) which
creates diagnostic sensors for Switches & Hubs. SNMP-
SNMP-protocol is
usedd to
t read
d the
th Switch/HUB
S it h/HUB portt status.
t t
ALP again reads the diagnostic sensors from Netwatch and creates
System Alarms.
Syste a s

Alarm in Alarm List


*<time> ** SYS NW01 HP_J40
HP J40 A1-
A1-SWI<nn> SNMP DEVICE FAULT
e.g. "nn" = 01 for Switch 1 or 02 for switch 2.
Cause of alarm:
• Loose connection or faulty cable
• Switch broken
Effect:
• The server connected to this port has now routed it’s
communication to the rest of the system
y via the reserve bus.

7
VALMARINE
Switch
S it h Alarm
Al II
Alarm in Alarm List
*<time> ** SYS NW01 HP_J40 A1
A1--SWI<nn> DEVICE NO
RSPONSE
e.g. "nn" = 01 for Switch 1 or 02 for switch 2.
e g "nn"
e.g. nn = 01 for Switch 1 or 02 for switch 22.
Cause of alarm:
Ê• Switch not responding. The switch has lost power, or it has some
internal fault.
Effect:
•Anyy equipment
q p connected only
y to this switch will stop
p functioning.
g
Redundant configured equipment will continue to function normally,
using a different switch.

8
Process bus Alarms
VALMARINE
from
f NCU
Alarm in Alarm List
*<<time> ** SYS <nn> slot06 M CHAN<j> DISCONECTED
*<time> ** SYS <nn> slot06 R CHAN<j> DISCONECTED
e.g. "nn" = AP01 Process Station. “M” = main, “R”= res. “j” = channel number on
NCU2 card (1 or 2).
Cause of alarm:
• Cable disconnected or broken.
• Network unit on bus, for example ECFR repeater, not working.
• Terminator on cable wrong type or missing.
missing
• NCA adapter card not working.
Effect:
• The specified NCU channel has no communication.
• If the station is a redundant process station, this is either the update bus
(see above), or the system bus. If the system bus fails on an active processor,
operation
ti will
ill b
be switched
it h d over to
t the
th passive
i processor.
If only one channel fails on a station with two channels connected, the station will
continue to operate without interruption. If both channels fail, the station will lose all
communication to the rest of the system, but will continue to run independently.

9
VALMARINE
PC NCU Al
Alarm
Alarm in Alarm List
*<time> ** SYS <nn> slot16 NCU NO RESPONCE
e g "nn"
e.g. nn = A1A1 Alarm Station
Station.

Cause of alarm:
• Cable disconnected or broken.
• NCU service on PC has terminated abnormally.

Effect:
• The PC has no communication with the rest of the system.
The stations on the PC which gives the alarm will continue to run
independently

10
System Bus Alarms
VALMARINE Databackup
D t b k F Fault
lt

Alarm in Alarm List


*S
S AP01 Process Station 1 Databackup Fault

C
Cause off alarm:
l
• The backup (parameters) from station to BU failed
Effect:
• The parameter (alarm delay, alarm settings etc.) changes since last databackup is
not stored on the ESW (BU). If the Station (from example AP01) is restarted it will
l d “old”
load “ ld” values
l (values
( l since
i last
l t databackup).
d t b k )

11
VALMARINE
S it h portt alarm
Switch l
The network alarms on the control room side is created by a program
called Netwatch. Netwatch is actually an activity (XDi=station) which
creates diagnostic sensors for Switches & Hubs. SNMP-
SNMP-protocol is
used to read the Switch/HUB port status.
ALP again reads the diagnostic sensors from Netwatch and creates
System Alarms.

Alarm in Alarm List


*<time> ** SYS NW01 A1
A1--SWI<nn> p
port<jj>
jj SNMP PORT FAULT
e.g. "nn" = 01 for Switch 1 or 02 for switch 2.
e.g. "jj" = 01 for switch port 01.
C
Cause off alarm:
l
• The switch is no longer sensing any equipment connected to the named port. This will be
caused by a disconnected or broken cable.
Effect:
• In a redundant configured system (normally all OPS), each PC has two network cards.
These PC’s will now use the redundant connection, and function normally.
In a non-redundant connection, the equipment connected to this port has now lost its
network connection, and will not function properly.
12
VALMARINE
IO Rack
R k Alarms
Al
Al
Alarm iin Alarm
Al List:
Li t
*<time>
<time>**
** SYS <nn> slot02 iorack<i> PIC FAULT
e.g. "nn" = AP01 Process Station, "i" = 08
Cause of alarm:
• Disturbances in the connection with the I/O rack
• Station loses contact with the I/O rack
• The I/O rack's power supply unit (IPU) is faulty
• The I/O rack
rack'ss Process Interface Controller (PIC) is faulty
• If the IPU and PIC are configured redundantly, one IPU and PIC may still be in operation.

Effect:
• The motors, valves, controllers etc. that receive their I/O data through the affected I/O rack
may generate a fault alarm
• If the I/O rack is not provided with redundancy
redundancy, these devices are no longer in control; in a
redundantly configured system they still operate
• If the I/O rack is not provided with redundancy, the measurements read through the rack will
be frozen at the last value; in a redundantly configured system new measured values
will
ill enter
t iin th
the normall manner.

13
VALMARINE
IO Card
C d Alarms
Al
Alarm in Alarm List:
<time> ** SYS <nn> slot02 iorack<i> IO-
IO-DISTURBANCE CARD <j>
e.g. "nn" = AP01 Process Station, "i" = 01, "j" = 19
(i = PIC adress/rack number, j = I/O card number)
Cause of alarm:
• Process Interface Controller (PIC) has lost connection to the indicated I/O unit
• The I/O unit is faulty

• The I/O unit's process interface is faulty

Effect:
• A device that receives its I/O data through the affected I/O unit may generate a
fault alarm
• S h device
Such d i iis no llonger controllable
ll bl
• Measurement read through the affected I/O unit is frozen at its last
value.

14
VALMARINE
Si
Signal
lFFaults
lt
In loop display the numerical value changes to yellow.
yellow
In addition a series of numbers ( e.g. 146 ) appears below the lower left corner
of the numerical value frame,, and the FLT button is displayed
p y at the right-
right
g -hand side
of the window.
The series 146 means that faults 1,4,and 6 are present.

It is possible to display the specifies for the fault numbers by pressing the FLT button.

1. External fault: Transmitter supply fault.


2. Overflow: Result over/under range
3. Simulation meas/local: Simulated analoug data.
4. Invalid data Unreadable data
5. Old data: Data not updatad
6. Derived fault: Derived fault, e.i an I/O fault to a pump module can
course fault like this.

15
VALMARINE
Si
Signal
lFFaults
Faults,
lt , examples
l
Loop display information for different loops.
loops

Analogue Measurement: Measurement Fault.htm


Controller : Controller Fault.htm
Pump: Pump Fault.htm
Magnetic Valve: Valve Fault
Fault.htm
htm

16
Page 1 of 1

Signal faults

In Graphic and Group Displays a signal fault will


change the numerical value's background to fault
colour.

In loop display the numerical value's background


changes to yellow. In addition, a series of
numbers (e.g. 146) appears below the lower left
corner of the numerical value frame, and the FLT
button is displayed at the right-hand side of the
window.

The series 146 means that faults 1, 4 and 6 are on.


You can display the specifiers for the fault
numbers by pressing the FLT button.

file://\\apssdata1\tecnico\80 Training Course\10 Valmarine\Valmarine\Course Docum... 14/04/2011


Page 1 of 1

Control disturbance specifiers

When a control disturbance occurs, the text


DISTURB will appear on the loop display. By
pointing it the control disturbance specification
can be displayed.

Only the specifiers for currently active


disturbances are displayed.

The specifiers stay on even if the disturbance


itself becomes redundant.

file://\\apssdata1\tecnico\80 Training Course\10 Valmarine\Valmarine\Course Docum... 14/04/2011


Page 1 of 2

In loop display

1 Title and/or tag identifier


2 Running status
I = Running (ON)
>I = Starting
O = Stopped (OFF)
>O = Stopping
3 Control mode selection status
M = manual
A = automatic
L = local
4 Operability
NO OP = Operations prevented
(masked)
5 Measured current with unit
6 Fixed status data
RI = Release ON
RO = Release OFF
FI = Forced control ON
FO = Forced control OFF
WD = Watchdog failure
CU = Overcurrent
7 Status descriptions
NO REL I = No release ON
NO REL O = No release OFF
FORCED ON = Forced control ON
FORCED OFF = Forced control OFF
WATCHDOG = Watchdog failure
CUR H = Current over high limit
CUR HH = Current over higher
highlimit
8 Explanations of watchdog failures
FAIL ON =Failed start
FAIL OFF = Failed stop
DIST ON = Disturbance start
DIST OFF = Disturbance stop
STATUS FLT = Faulty status data
ICONTFAULT = ON control fault
OCONTFAULT = OFF control fault
9 Application data
Symbols depend on application
10 Descriptions of application data
Descriptions depend on application
When data is effective, its description is displayed.

Signal faults

A fault in running status will change the

file://\\apssdata1\tecnico\80 Training Course\10 Valmarine\Valmarine\Course Docum... 14/04/2011


Page 2 of 2

background of the affected motor or pump to fault


colour in Graphic Display.

In Group Display a fault will change the


background of running status to fault colour.

In loop display the background of running status


will change to yellow. A series of fault numbers is
also shown below the lower left corner of the
square. The descriptions for the numbers can be
displayed with the FLT button in the same way as
for controller faults.

file://\\apssdata1\tecnico\80 Training Course\10 Valmarine\Valmarine\Course Docum... 14/04/2011


Page 1 of 3

In loop display

1 Title and/or tag identifier

2 Valve position

3 Control mode selection status

M = manual
A = automatic
L = local

4 Text location area

5 Fixed status data

RI = release ON (OPEN)
RO = Release OFF (CLOSE)
FI = Forced control ON (OPEN)
FO = Forced control OFF (CLOSE)
WD = Watchdog failure
SM =Limit switch mask

6 Status descriptions

NO R OPEN = No release OPEN


NO R CLSE = No release CLOSE
FORC OPEN = Forced control OPEN
FORC CLSE = Forced control CLOSE
WATCH DST = Watchdog failure
LSW MASK = Limit switch mask

7 Explanations of watchdog failures

OLIM LOST = No opening limit data


CLIM LOST = No closing limit data
O TIMEOUT = Valve did not open within the
specified time
C TIMEOUT = Valve did not close within the
specified time
NO MOVE O = Valve does not open; it has
jammed in the closed position
NO MOVE C = Valve does not close; it has
jammed in the open position
OLIM FLT = Opening limit is faulty
CLIM FLT = Closing limit is faulty
OCNTRL FLT = Opening control fault
CCNTRL FLT = Closing control fault

8 Application-specific status data

Symbols depend on application

9 Application-specific descriptions

file://\\apssdata1\tecnico\80 Training Course\10 Valmarine\Valmarine\Course Docum... 14/04/2011


Page 2 of 3

Descriptions depend on application. When data


is in effect, its description is displayed.
10 Symbols for valve positions

a) Closed
b) Open
c) Opening
d) Closing
e) Stopped at intermediate position

1.1.8 Signal faults

Position status fault will change the frame of


valve symbol to fault colour in Graphic Display.

In Group Display a fault will change the


background of position status to fault colour.

In loop display the background of position status


will change to yellow. A series of fault numbers is
also shown below the lower left corner of the
square. The descriptions for the numbers can be
displayed with the FLT button in the same way as
for controller faults.

file://\\apssdata1\tecnico\80 Training Course\10 Valmarine\Valmarine\Course Docum... 14/04/2011


Page 3 of 3

file://\\apssdata1\tecnico\80 Training Course\10 Valmarine\Valmarine\Course Docum... 14/04/2011


VALMARINE BTMU Al
Alarms

Alarms in Alarm List


*P
P System Cabinet xx Mains Failure
*P IO Cabinet xx FPUS yy Mains Failire

*P
P System Cabinet xx Low Battery
*P IO Cabinet xx FPUS yy Low Battery

Cause of alarm:
• Mains supply to the System Cabinet or I/O Cabinet is lost
• Battery capacity is low
low.
Effect:
• If Mains Supply
pp y is gone
g the battery
y will take over (uninterrupted)
( p ) for 30 min. After that
the Stations will go down, with the effect like we have described earlier.
•If Battery capacity is low it may happen that the Stations will go down before 30min.

17
VALMARINE E th Fault
Earth F lt Alarms
Al

Alarms in Alarm List


*P
P Earth Fault I/O Cabinet xx FPUS yy

C
Cause off alarm:
l
• One of the sensors connected to the two I/O Racks powered from this FPUS have earth
fault.

Effect:
•The sensor will not give correct readings in the Damatic XDi System. The earth fault
can damage the sensor and other equipment.

18
VALMARINE
L
Loop Display
Di l

19
VALMARINE
VALVE CONTROLL
VALMARINE
VALVE TYPES

Ê SINGLE ACTING VALVE ( SAFETY VALVE)


Ê DOUBLE ACTING VALVE
Ê DOUBLE ACKTING POSITION VALVE (CONTROL VALVE )
Ê MOTOR DRIVEN VALVE ( BINARY PULSES)
Ê ANALOUGE DRIVEN VALVE ( I/P CONVERTER )

2
SIGNAL DESCRIPTION OF SINGLE
VALMARINE
ACKTING VALVE

Ê OPEN ( BINARY OUTPUT, NO)


The Damatic System operates the open solenoid.The open signal is active
as long as the valve is open.The valve will automatically close when the
open signal is removed.

Ê OPENED ( BINARY INPUT


INPUT, NO)
This signal gives opened feed-
feed-back to the system and will be indicated on
the monitor (mimic) when the valve is open.

Ê CLOSED ( BINARY INPUT, NO)


This signal gives closed feed-
feed-back to the system and will be indicated on
the monitor (mimic) when the valve is closed.

3
SIGNAL DESCRIPTION OF DOUBLE
VALMARINE
ACKTING VALVE

Ê OPEN ( BINARY OUTPUT, NO)


The Damatic System operates the open solenoid.The open signal is active
until the opened feedback is received or as long as described in the
program.

Ê CLOSE ( BINARY OUTPUT


OUTPUT, NO)
The Damatic System operates the close solenoid.The close signal is active
g as described in the program.
until the closed feedback is received or as long p g

Ê OPENED ( BINARY INPUT, NO)


This signal gives opened feed-
feed-back to the system and will be indicated on
the monitor (mimic) when the valve is open.

Ê CLOSED ( BINARY INPUT,, NO))


This signal gives closed feed-
feed-back to the system and will be indicated on
the monitor (mimic) when the valve is closed.

4
ELETRICAL PRINCILPE DRAWING
VALMARINE FORSINGLE ACKTING VALVE

5
ELETRICAL PRINCILPE DRAWING
VALMARINE FOR DOUBLE ACKTING VALVE

6
ELETRICAL PRINCILPE DRAWING
VALMARINE FOR MOTOR DRIVEN VALVE

7
ELETRICAL PRINCILPE DRAWING
VALMARINE ANALOUGE VALVE

8
OPERATION ON GRAPICH
VALMARINE
DISPLAY
Ê 1 Title and/or tag identifier
Ê 2 Valve position
Ê 3 Control mode selection status
Ê M = manual
Ê A = automatic
t ti
Ê L = local
Ê 4 Text location area

9
VALMARINE OPERATION ON LOOP DISPLAY 1
Ê In loop display
Ê 1 Title and/or tag identifier
2 Valve position
3 Control mode selection status
M = manual
A = automatic
L = local
4 Text location area
5 Fixed status data
Ê RI = release ON
O (OPEN)
(O )
Ê RO = Release OFF (CLOSE)
Ê FI = F
Forced
d control
t l ON (OPEN)
Ê FO = Forced control OFF (CLOSE)
Ê WD = Watchdog failure
Ê SM =Limit switch mask
10
OPERATION ON LOOP DISPLAY 2
VALMARINE

Ê 6 Status descriptions
Ê NO R OPEN = No
N release
l OPEN
Ê NO R CLSE = No release CLOSE
Ê FORC OPEN = Forced control OPEN
Ê FORC CLSE = Forced control CLOSE
Ê WATCH DST = Watchdog failure
Ê LSW MASK = Limit switch mask
Ê CCNTRL FLT = Closing control fault

11
OPERATION ON LOOP DISPLAY 3
VALMARINE

Ê 7 Explanations of watchdog failures


Ê OLIM LOST = No opening limit data
Ê CLIM LOST = No closing limit data
Ê O TIMEOUT = Valve did not open within the specified time
Ê C TIMEOUT = Valve did not close within the specified time
Ê NO MOVE O = Valve does not open; it has jammed in the closed position
Ê NO MOVE C = Valve does not close;; it has jammed
j in the open
p position
p
Ê OLIM FLT = Opening limit is faulty
Ê CLIM FLT = Closing limit is faulty
Ê OCNTRL FLT = Opening control fault
Ê CCNTRL FLT = Closing control fault
Ê 8 Application-
Application-specific status data
Ê Symbols depend on application

12
OPERATION ON LOOP DISPLAY 4
VALMARINE

9 Application-specific
Application specific descriptions

Descriptions depend on application.


When data is in effect, its description is displayed.

10 Symbols for valve positions

a) Closed
b) Open
c) Opening
d) Closing
e) Stopped at intermediate position

13
PUMPS , MOTOR & FANS
VALMARINE
CONTROLL
TYPE OF MOTORS,PUMPS &
VALMARINE
FANS

Ê SINGLE SPEED
Ê One speed one direction
direction.

Ê SINGLE SPEED AND REVERSABLE


Ê One speed both direction (E.g. supply and exhaust fan).

Ê TWO SPEED
Ê Two speed ( Low and High) one direction
direction.

Ê TWO SPEED AND REVERSABLE.


T
Two speed
d ( Low
L and
d high
hi h ) and
d both
b th direction
di ti (Supply
(S l and
d exhaust)
h t)

Ê SPEED CONTROLLED.
Variable speed ( frequency speed controlled ).

2
SIGNAL DESCRIPTION SINGLE
VALMARINE
SPEED MOTOR
MOTOR,PUMP
PUMP & FAN

Ê START ( BINARY OUTPUT, NO)


The Damatic Systemy operates
p the start relay.The
y start p
pulse is active until
the run feedback is received or until the a maximum time has been reached
( start failure).

Ê STOP ( BINARY OUTPUT, NC)


The Damatic System operates the stop relay. The stop pulse is active for a
period stated in the program
program.

Ê RUNNING ( BINARY INPUT, NO)


This signal gives running feed-
feed-back to the system and will be indicated on
the monitor (mimic) when the motor is running.

Ê LOCAL/REMOTE ( BINARY INPUT, CLOSED CONTACT = LOCAL)


In REMOTE position the start can be done from the Damatic Keyboard.
In LOCAL the start is inhibited from the Damatic Keyboard.
St t/St can only
Start/Stop l ttake
k place
l ffrom th
the llocall starter
t t panel.
l

3
ELETRICAL PRINCILPE DRAWING
VALMARINE FOR PUMP STARTER-
STARTER-BOX

4
OPERATION ON GRAPICH
VALMARINE
DISPLAY
Ê In graphic display
Ê 1 Title and/or tag identifier
Ê 2 Running status (shown by a symbol in Graphic Display)
Ê 3 Control mode selection status
Ê M = manual
Ê A = automatic
Ê L= local
Ê 4 Text location area

5
VALMARINE OPERATION ON LOOP DISPLAY 1
Ê
1 Title
Titl and/or
d/ tagt identifier
id tifi
2 Running status
I = Running (ON)
>I = Starting
St ti
O = Stopped (OFF)
>O = Stopping
3 Control mode selection status
M = manual
A = automatic
L = local
4 Operability
NO OP = Operations prevented (masked)
5 Measured current with unit
6 Fixed status data
RI = Release ON
RO = Release
R l OFF
FI = Forced control ON
FO = Forced control OFF
WD = Watchdog failure
CU = Overcurrent
6
VALMARINE OPERATION ON LOOP DISPLAY 2
7 Status descriptions
Ê NO REL I = No release ON
NO REL O = No release OFF
FORCED ON = Forced control ON
FORCED OFF = Forced control OFF
WATCHDOG = Watchdog failure
CUR H = Current
CU Cu e over
ove high
g limit
CUR HH = Current over higher highlimit
8 Explanations of watchdog failures
FAIL ON =Failed
Failed start
FAIL OFF = Failed stop
DIST ON = Disturbance start
DIST OFF = Disturbance stop
STATUS FLT = Faulty status data
ICONTFAULT = ON control fault
OCONTFAULT = OFF control fault
9 Application data
Symbols depend on application
10 Descriptions of application data
Descriptions depend on application
7
VALMARINE
PID Controllers
VALMARINE
Wh t do
What d we need
d?

Ê 1.Process
Ê The equipment where a certain set point is to be maintained ( e.g. a
temperature , a level or a pressure.

Ê 2.Measuring Sensor.
Ê A sensor measuring the actual value to be controlled.

Ê 3.Controller
Ê The equipment
q p witch take action if actual value deviates from the set-
set-
point, keeping a balance between supply and what is consumed and
lost in the process

Ê 4..Actuator
Ê E.g a valve restricting the supply to the process.

2
VALMARINE
P
Parameters
t

Ê To keep a stable and accurate regulation in the loop the


following parameters can be used.
Ê 1.Kp = Proportional gain.
Ê 2.Ti = Integral time
Ê 3 Td = Derivation time
3.Td time.

3
VALMARINE

P - Controller
Ê For a (proportional ) controller the output signal is changing proportional to the
change of input signal,
signal or change in the set-point.
set point
How much the output will change depends on the “GAIN”. Normally named Kp .
A small gain = a small change of output.
output
A big gain = a big change of output.
If gain is to big there is a risk for instability in the regulation.

Setpoint
Input
changes
signal

Respons
Output
signal
VALMARINE

I - Controller
Ê An I- controller ( integral ) will gradually change the output signal if a change of
input signal occur or a change in the set-point.
set-point
The rate of change is proportional to the derivation and a given integral time,
normally named Ti.
The integral time is the time it will take to change the output signal 100% if the
input
p signal
g change
g 100%.
VALMARINE D Controller
D-Controller

Ê A D-controller ( derivation ) will derive the signal in the start of the


regulation
regulation.
The derivation has the opposite effect as the integration.
A D-controller is very seldom used,
used but in the other hand together with other
regulators, like PD and PID.

PD PID

6
VALMARINE Tuning of controllers
Ê Tuning of controllers
controllers.
There is a thumb rule who to tune a controller.
1 Set the integral time to a high value e.g.(
1. e g ( Ti = 200).
200) ( A P-control
P control will then
remain),
2. Gradually increase the gain (Kp) until instability occurs.This gain is called Kp-
critical.
iti l
3. Find the periodic cycle for the instability. This time is called T critical.
The TREND in Damatic XD is useful in this respect.
respect
4. Normally, Kp = Kp critical x 0.45 and Ti = Ti critical x 0.85 will give a control
function which is close to the correct parameter value.

7
VALMARINE Cascade controller
Ê A cascade controller is a controller made up of two controllers
controllers.
One controller is used to give a variable ( remote) set point to the other
controller as a function of the deviation between set-point and actual value.
This controller is using the local set point.
The other controller (connected to the actuator ) will then regulate accordance
to the variable set point.
This controller is using the remote set point.
This kind of regulation
g is used when you
y want regulate
g the inlet side as
function of variation at the outlet side of a loop.

8
VALMARINE
Feed forward controller
Ê A feed forward controller is a controller that automatically will change the set
point as a result of a dramatic change of some parameters in the loop or that
the loop change characteristic. Normally the number will be added or
subtracted to the existing set point.
point

9
VALMARINE
Forced controller(Fc)
Ê A forced control is controller that will force the position of the valve to a fixed (pre-
programmed) position as a result of an input from the plant.
Forced control has always the priority, means that, if the controller receive a special signal
from the plant
plant, the controller will force the valve to a pre
pre-programmed
programmed position and stay
there until the special signal from the plant is not present any more. Then the controller will
automatically return to previous state.

10
VALMARINE
Forced manual (Fm)
Ê A controller will be forced to manual if the measuring sensor or the feedback
sensor to the controller is broken.
It means the controller will automatically be changed to manual, and the valve
will stay in the position it was when the sensor fault occurs.
If will not be possible to set the controller to auto before the sensor fault is
rectified.

11
VALMARINE
Controller & modes
Ê A controller can be in the followings modes:

In graphic display
1 Title or tag identifier
2 Measured value and unit
3 Set-point
4 Output signal and unit
5SSet-point
t i t selection
l ti
L = Local set-point
R = Remote set-point
C = Computer set-point
6 Control mode selection
M=M
Manuall
A = Automatic
L = Local
L l
F = Forced control
12
f = Forced manual control
VALMARINE
Parameter adjustment
Ê The following parameter can be adjusted in the following way:

13
DIESEL GENERATOR
VALMARINE
CONTROL
VALMARINE
DIESEL STARTER PROGRAMS
Ê MANUAL START FROM KEYBOARD (or local start via DXD)
Ê MANUAL STOP FROM KEYBOARD (or
( local stop
p via DXD))
Ê AUTOMATIC START
Ê AUTOMATIC STOP
Ê MONITORING OF CRITICAL PARAMETER WHEN DIESEL IS
RUNNING
Ê PRIORITY START/STOP SELECTION

2
VALMARINE
MANUAL START
Normally three start attempts, each at 10 seconds, are given . The
delay between each attempts can e.g. be 5 seconds. If start is not
succeeded, a start failure alarm occurs.
Blocking signal from machinery space would prevent all start attempts.
Sometimes also external start is coming from e.g. MSB via DXD. The
request for start is treated the same way as start from OPS
OPS.

3
VALMARINE
MANUAL STOP
If the system reads a stop-
stop-command,
command it will first check if the load from the
generator is less then 10% of nominal power(Information is coming from the
PMS system ).The stopping program will wait for this information and then open
the breaker. When the generator breaker is open, the diesel is running through
the COOLING period (normally 5 minutes) and then activate the stop-stop-coil.The
stop signal will be active for 1minute (configurable in SW) and then the program
will return the diesel to READY status.

It is possible to interrupt the stop sequence both in the DELOADING and


COOLING by pushing the RESET BUTTON. he program will then return to
running and also synchronise the generator to the net.
If the engine has come to COOLING STATUS and you want to by-
by-pass the
cooling time, you can press STOP BUTTON once more.

4
VALMARINE AUTOMATIC START

The system offers 4 possibilities:


1. Load-
Load-dependent start request ( request from the PMS ).
2. Black-
Black-out monitoring ( request from the PMS ) .
3. Start because of SHD on a connected engine.
4. Alarm start ( request from monitoring and alarm system).

If (Available Power < than load dep.start


dep start limit + delay) then start engine

O l an engine
Only i in
i Automatic
A t ti and
d with
ith the
th breaker
b k ini Automatic
A t ti will
ill be
b treated
t t d as
an standby engine.
An alarm start will first start up the next in line engine and when this is
connected stop the “sick” one if available power to stop.
5
VALMARINE AUTOMATIC STOP
LOAD--DEPENDENT STOP
LOAD
When the Damatic diesel program receives a load
load--dependent stop request from
the PMS, it will give a stop command to the engine next in line to stop.
If (Avail power > Load dep. stop limit (+delay)) then Stop engine

MONITORING OF CRITICAL PARAMETERS WHEN DIESEL IS


RUNNING.
Following parameters are the most common shut-
shut-down signals:
– Low lubrication oil pressure
– High
g cooling g water temperature
p
– Electrical over-
over-speed.

6
VALMARINE PRIORITY SELECTION
If the Damatic diesel starter receive an automatic start request
request, the program will
give a start command to the diesel witch is next in line to start. The first one to
stop can be programmed to be either the one with highest priority or the lowest.
Normally we are following the “first
first in - last out”
out principle.
The operator can select the priority sequence from the Diesel Starter mimic.
Note that “older” pprograms
g have only
y standby y selection of one engine.
g He then
selects one in standby, which will be the first one to start (or stop). The rest of
the start sequence will follow the DG number (DG1,2,3,4 etc.) So if the Standby
g
engine is already
y running,
g the next one to be started is DG2.

By clicking on the Priority x Field you will get up


a menu from where you select the new priority
g
for this diesel engine.

7
VALMARINE RESET FROM KEYBOARD

The following alarms can only be reseted from the reset push-
push-button at the
Diesel mimic:
– All shutdown
– Start/stop failure
– Generator breaker alarms like synchronising time-
time-out.

Cooling and Deloading can also be resetted and the engine will then go back
to running and make a synchronising attemt.

If we have an external safety system


system, we may have to reset the shutdowns
locally . This input should then go via DXD and reset only the shutdowns.

8
VALMARINE
INHIBITTING START OF DIESEL
The following parameters can make a BLOCKING of diesel start:

– Diesel generator in local.


– Turning gear engaged
– Slow turn fail
– Lub.. Oil inlet pressure low
Lub
– Remote control not selected
– Earth failure of generator circuit detected.

The above mention is only example and will vary from vessel to vessel. Usually
there is a special mimic telling the operator the reason for the blocking.

Example of a blocking mimic.

9
Diesel generator start/stop
VALMARINE
sequence
Click on the picture below to
start the Video sequence.

10
DIESEL STARTER PRINSIPLE
VALMARINE DRAWING

11
POWER MANAGEMENT
VALMARINE
SYSTEM
VALMARINE
PMS MODES
The following main function are available:
- Automatic synchronising
- Automatic load sharing and frequency control
- Loaddependent start/stop
- Black--out monitoring
Black
- Blocking of heavy consumers
- Unbalanced loadsharing.
g

All automatic functions can individually


y be
selected to AUTO or MAN. When one function
is selected to MAN an alarm is given.
When bustie is open,
open separate settings can
be done for each swithcboard.

2
VALMARINE
SYNCHRONISING
Automatic synchronising is performed by a synchronising unit, mounted in
main switch board. The PMS selects which generator to be synchronised to the
net, then the synchronising
synchronising--unit takes care of the the pilot (governor) motor
control, checks that the voltage and frequency deviation between generator and
nett is
i within
ithi acceptable
t bl values,
l andd finally
fi ll gives
i the
th breaker
b k ini command.d
If synchronising exceed 1 minute, a synchronising time-
time-out alarm will be given.
The diesel generator will continue to run and if there is an automatic start-
start-
situation another diesel generator will start.

3
LOADSHARING AND FREQUENCY
VALMARINE
CONTROL
The loadsharing and frequency control are based on input data from net
frequency and generator load. Damatic controls the speed of the diesel-
diesel-
generators,, witch is proportionally
g p p y to the generator
g frequency,by
q y, y give
g upp and
down pulses to the governor. Damatic keeps a steady net frequency and will
also, when more than one generator are connected, perform loadsharing
between the generators.
To prevent the system from giving pulses to the governor on small differences
between the loads, the system accept normally a hysteresis of ± 5% of
generators nominal load.
load

4
VALMARINE UNBALANCED LOADSHARING
Unbalanced loadsharing is possible when 2 or more generators are connected
to net.
One generator will be running to a custom specified value, e.g.75%, while the
other generator(s) are acting as topping up.
If topping up generator reaches a low load-
load-limit, e.g 20%, the load will
automatically be taken off main generator
generator, and balanced mode is selected by
the program, until the load starts to increase again.The same will happened if
the topping up generator reach a high-
high-limit e.g. 80%.
Thi iis d
This done tto preventt th
the diesels
di l ffrom sooting
ti (low
(l load)
l d) and
d to
t preventt
black--out (high load).
black

5
LOAD DEPENDENT
VALMARINE
START/STOP
D
Damatic
ti calculate
l l t the
th net’s
t’ nominal
i l power and
d measure load
l d on each
h generator.
t
The available power is calculated as follows:
Avail
Avail. power = Net
Net’s
s nominal power - (tot.
(tot load on net + reserved pwr)
If available power is less then a custom specified value, e.g. 100kW, in more then 15
seconds (limit and timedelay can be changed from mimic), Damatic will start up a
new diesel generator, synchronise to the net and do the loadsharing.
If more than one generator is running and available power is more then e.g. 1300kW
for more then 10 minutes (limit and timedelay can be changed from mimic), Damatic
will stop a diesel generator. If available power is less then 1300kw during the
10minutes period the timer will start again for a new 10 minutes period.

6
VALMARINE BLACK--OUT MONITORING
BLACK

Black-out situation exist if none of the main switches are in closed position, the
Black-
blackout relay is active and no voltage at the main switch board is detected.
detected
Then Damatic immediately starts the stand.by diesel generator, witch is ready.
As soon as the voltage from the generator is within + - 10% of nominal
nominal, the
Damatic system will send a pulse (direct in ) to close the breaker,due to the fact
that the synchronising is bypassed.

7
BLOCKING OF HEAVY
VALMARINE CONSUMERS

Normally big motors, thrusters and compressors are incorporated in this mode.
If there is not enough available power to start one of these large consumers
consumers, an
output signal ( can also be made in software) will be made to prevent the start.
A start attempt on a blocked consumers will cause automatic start-
start-up of a
diesel generator, if the system is in load dependent start/stop mode is on. Else a
new diesel generator must be manually started.

8
DAMATIC CONTROL OF
VALMARINE
GOVERNOR

9
VALMARINE
SYNCRONISING PRINCIPLE

10
APIS ERS
CAE VALMARINE

Logger and report system


Introduction
• Choose from the complete list of signals in your Damatic XD/DNA
system
• Select the signals for logging that you need
• View or pprintout anyy logged
gg signal
g from the databases in trends,
tables or reports
• Import data to MS Excel for further investigations
• Logging of alarms from the Damatic XD/DNA system
• Create your own user reports
• One database logging at 60 second rate saved for one year (Main
logging)
• One database logging at 0.5 second rate saved for one week (Fast
logging)
• Create your own reports with a variety of features (se own chapter)
• Making SoftPLC logic (option)
• Data backup
Component Overview

DNA OPS DNA OPS XDS Laptop computer

Ethernet
Switch / Router

APIS ERS Laser printer(s)


(SERVER)

Damatic XD, DXD, Alarm Stations


Router station with NCU2 HVAC and MAS
APIS HIVE
APIS HIVE is
i the
h ”Brain”
”B i ” in
i the
h APIS system. It
I keeps
k trackk off allll available
il bl
signals and which one are set to be logged.
APIS HIVE controls the parts of APIS and what they are supposed to do.
APIS HIVE Configuration
• To configure APIS HIVE there is a user interface called “APIS
HIVE Configuration”
• ”Expert” users can from this tool add APIS modules, configure
the modules and add and remove tags/signals.
tags/signals
• ”Daily” users can add and remove tags/signal to be logged in
the databases and configure automatic printout of user
reports.
• To locate yyour requested
q tag/signal
g g there is a powerful
p filter
system available
Terminology
• MAIN: The main database
• MAS_MAIN: Communication module containing all machinery
tags/signals available for logging in MAIN
• HVAC MAIN : Communication module containing all HVAC
HVAC_MAIN
tags/signals available for logging in MAIN

• FAST: The fast database


• MAS_FAST : Communication module containing all machinery
tags/signals available for logging in FAST
“Inside” APIS HIVE 1
DAILY USE
Prepare:
• Add and/or remove tags to logging in database by using desktop
shortcuts to APIS HIVE Configuration.
DAILY USE
View / reports:
• APIS Process Explorer.
Explorer View history in trends,
trends tables or lists
• APIS Alarms. Search and view in 6 month alarm history
• APIS Excel Import.
p Import
p data historyy into Excel
• APIS User reports. Make and view your own reports
MAINTENANCE
• Backup: Runs every night
• Copies important data to tape
• Change the tape once a week and have a system that gives you the
following order:
– Tape 1: Last month
– Tape
T 2:
2 Last
L t weekk
– Tape 3: This week
TROUBLESHOOTING
If APIS does not log tags/signals:
• Open a Command Prompt and form there:
– PING Local IP address
– PING NCA 2 IP address
– PING Multicast address
– PING other products connected to the same ethernet
ethernet. (DNA OPS
OPS,
printers, etc.)
APIS User Guide

• User Guide
Guide.pdf
pdf
APIS ERS User Guide 3.0

Summary:
This document describes:
• General topics about APIS ERS
• <main item>

Document id:
Project No:
Rev. Issue date Reason for issue Issued by Checked Approved

A0 First issue

File No.: APIS ERS User Guide 3.0.doc Page 1 of 27


APIS Extended Report System User Damatic XD
Guide Marine System

Section Table Of Contents Page

1 GENERAL..........................................................................................................................4
1.1 P URPOSE ........................................................................................................................... 4
1.2 TARGET GROUPS............................................................................................................... 4
1.3 DOCUMENT STORAGE........................................................................................................ 4
1.4 DOCUMENT RESPONSIBLE .................................................................................................. 4
1.5 RELATED DOCUMENTS ...................................................................................................... 4
1.6 DOCUMENT HISTORY......................................................................................................... 4
1.7 DEFINITIONS ..................................................................................................................... 4
1.7.1 Abbreviations............................................................................................................4
1.7.2 Definition of Expressions...........................................................................................4
2 INTRODUCTION TO THE APIS ERS LOGGING SYSTEM............................................5
2.1 COMPONENT OVERVIEW .................................................................................................... 5
2.2 APIS ERS SERVER ............................................................................................................ 5
2.3 DNA OPS AND XDS......................................................................................................... 6
2.4 LAP-TOPS (OPTION)........................................................................................................... 6
2.5 ROUTER TO ADMIN SYSTEM (OPTION) ................................................................................. 6
2.6 ERS FEATURES.................................................................................................................. 6
3 CONFIGURING SIGNALS FOR LOGGING.....................................................................7
3.1 SELECT AND START A SHORTCUT........................................................................................ 7
3.2 STARTING APIS HIVE ........................................................................................................ 7
3.3 CONFIGURING ONE SIGNAL FOR LOGGING IN DATABASE ....................................................... 8
3.4 REMOVING ONE SIGNAL FROM LOGGING AND DATABASE ................................................... 10
3.5 CONFIGURING SEVERAL SIGNAL FOR LOGGING IN DATABASE.............................................. 10
3.6 USING FILTER FUNCTIONS ................................................................................................ 11
3.6.1 Using Wildcards......................................................................................................11
3.6.2 Main item filter settings...........................................................................................11
3.6.3 Column filtering ......................................................................................................13
3.7 CONFIGURING AUTOMATICALLY PRINTOUT OF A REPORT ................................................... 14
4 MAKING YOUR OWN REPORTS ..................................................................................15
4.1 STARTING APIS JAR........................................................................................................ 15
4.2 CREATING A REPORT ........................................................................................................ 15
4.3 REPORT TYPES ................................................................................................................ 16
4.3.1 Immediate Reports...................................................................................................16
4.3.2 Time based Reports.................................................................................................16
4.4 DYNTEXT OBJECT ............................................................................................................ 17
4.4.1 Making headers and comments.................................................................................17
4.4.2 Getting TAG value, description, unit, etc...................................................................18
4.4.3 MAX, MIN, STD.DEV, MEAN..................................................................................19
4.4.4 ADD, MULTIPLY, SUBTRACT and DIVIDE.............................................................19
4.5 GRAPH OBJECT ............................................................................................................... 20
4.6 BARGRAPH OBJECT ......................................................................................................... 21
4.7 TREECNTRL OBJECT ........................................................................................................ 21
4.8 CREATING TIME BASED REPORTS..................................................................................... 22
4.8.1 Time selection part..................................................................................................22
4.8.2 Report part .............................................................................................................22
Document No.: <id> Rev. No.: A0
File No.: APIS ERS User Guide 3.0.doc Page 2 of 27
APIS Extended Report System User Damatic XD
Guide Marine System

5 DAILY USE OF APIS ERS...............................................................................................23


5.1 STARTING APIS P ROCESS EXPLORER ............................................................................... 23
5.1.1 Trend......................................................................................................................24
5.1.2 Trend......................................................................................................................25
5.1.3 Alarm page.............................................................................................................26
5.2 MAINTENANCE................................................................................................................ 27
5.2.1 Backup to tape ........................................................................................................27
5.2.2 Backup procedure ...................................................................................................27

Document No.: <id> Rev. No.: A0


File No.: APIS ERS User Guide 3.0.doc Page 3 of 27
APIS Extended Report System User Damatic XD
Guide Marine System

1 General
1.1 Purpose
The purpose of this document is to guide and train APIS users.
1.2 Target Groups
The document is aimed for following target groups:
• Engineers and electricians onboard ships with APIS
• CAE Valmarine Service- and project- engineers.
1.3 Document Storage
This document is stored under: <Path>\Document1
1.4 Document Responsible
Torbjørn Kågen is responsible for this document.
1.5 Related Documents
Doc. no. <document id> <Title of related document>
1.6 Document History
Rev Description of change Reason for Change

A0 This is the first issue.

1.7 Definitions

1.7.1 Abbreviations
<NN> <Explanation of the abbreviations in the document>
1.7.2 Definition of Expressions
<Expression> <Defin ition>

Document No.: <id> Rev. No.: A0


File No.: APIS ERS User Guide 3.0.doc Page 4 of 27
APIS Extended Report System User Damatic XD
Guide Marine System

2 Introduction to the APIS ERS logging system


APIS ERS is first of all a logging system. It is connected to the Damatic XD/DNA system and loggs
signals and alarms from this. All alarms that go to the alarm printers are logged electronically. And all
signals in the Damatic system are available to be logged in the database. How many signals your APIS
can log at the same time, is set by the licence agreement. The logged data can be viewed in trends, MS
Excel or in your own user reports. By viewing and using the logged data you will be able to monitor
your processes in a better way.

The rest of this chapter will give you an overview of APIS ERS components and features.
2.1 Component Overview
The APIS ERS system contains of one ERS server PC with an ERS configuration tools and ERS
browser. This PC is connected to the Damatic XD system with Ethernet.

DNA OPS DNA OPS XDS Laptop computer

Ethernet
Switch / Router

APIS ERS Laser printer(s)


(SERVER)

Damatic XD, DXD, Alarm Stations


Router station with NCU2 HVAC and MAS

Also connected to the Ethernet, are Damatic XD alarm station(s), network printer(s), Damatic XD
DNA OPS (Operator Stations) and option for a laptop computers and a router to the administrative
network.
2.2 APIS ERS server
The APIS ERS server is normally placed in the Engine Control Room (ECR) of the ship. It will have
a monitor, keyboard and mouse connected to it. This is the working place for:
• Configuring signals for logging
• Removing signals from logging
• Overview of the databases in use for logging
• Creating user reports
• Making SoftPLC logic (option)
• Data backup
Document No.: <id> Rev. No.: A0
File No.: APIS ERS User Guide 3.0.doc Page 5 of 27
APIS Extended Report System User Damatic XD
Guide Marine System

You can of course also work with your data from here, using the Internet Explorer web browser.
2.3 DNA OPS and XDS
Some of the DNA OPS and XDS in the Damatic XD system can be enabled for working with the ERS
system. When pressing an access button on the DNA OPS or XDS, a new window with Internet
Explorer will appear. Through this interface the user can work with the ERS system. The button may
looks like this:
2.4 Lap-Tops (option)
As an option, laptops can be used in the network. They connect to the ERS server through a web
browser.
2.5 Router to admin system (option)
As an option, a router can be installed in the network. This router can be connected to the
administrative network of the ship, enabling access from PC in this network. These PC must have
Internet Explorer browser installed.
2.6 ERS features
This is a short summery of the ERS features:
• View/printout any logged signal from the databases in trends, tables or reports
• Import data to MS Excel for further investigations
• Logging of alarms from the Damatic XD system, kept for six month
• One database logging at 60 second rate saved for one year (Main logging)
• One database logging at 0.5 second rate saved for one week (Fast logging)
• Choose from the complete list of signals in your Damatic XD system
• Create your own reports with a variety of features (se own chapter)
• Create SofPLC logic for generating new alarms or (se own chapter)

The following list gives the different licences and the distribution of tags between MAIN and FAST
database.
• 500 MAIN = 450 and FAST = 50
• 1000 MAIN = 800 and FAST = 100
• 1500 MAIN = 1400 and FAST = 100
• 2000 MAIN = 1900 and FAST = 100
• 2500 MAIN = 2350 and FAST = 150
• 3000 MAIN = 2800 and FAST = 200
• 3500 MAIN = 3250 and FAST = 250
• 4000 MAIN = 3750 and FAST = 250

In some special cases higher licences might be delivered.

Document No.: <id> Rev. No.: A0


File No.: APIS ERS User Guide 3.0.doc Page 6 of 27
APIS Extended Report System User Damatic XD
Guide Marine System

3 Configuring signals for logging


This chapter describes how you configure signals (tags) to be logged in the databases of the APIS ERS
system. There is two ways to do this. The easiest is to use the shortcuts on desktop. These shortcuts
have predefined filters for easier access to the tags you want to find. But skilled personnel can also use
the ApisHive Configuration. The secret in both cases is to understand and use the filter facility. The
filters are identical in all different part of Apis.
3.1 Select and Start a shortcut
As said earlier, the easiest way to add or remove tags is to use the shortcuts on desktop. Typically
there will be four shortcut handling add or remove MAS tags to or from MAIN and FAST. However,
if your system also includes a HVAC, HOTEL or CARGO system there will be two shortcuts for them
as well. The shortcuts are named with ADD or REMOVE and the module name. I.e. “Add to FAST
(MAS_FAST)”, will only present the tags that belongs to the MAS_FAST module but are not already
in the FAST database. The selection here will put the tags into logging in the FAST database. The
shortcut “Remove from FAST (MAS_FAST)” contains tags that also belong to the MAS_FAST
module, but are already in the FAST database. Selections and actions in this shortcut will remove the
selected tags from the FAST database.

3.2 Starting APIS Hive


APIS Hive is the configuration tool for managing the logging databases.
To start APIS Hive, double click with right mouse button on the rotating APIS letters in the task bar:

One click with the right mouse button will show the menu where you can select “Configure
ApisHive…”.
The third way to start ApisHive Configuration is to go at “Start->Programs->APIS->APIS Hive
Configuration”
The APIS Hive program will open, and you will have this user interface:

Document No.: <id> Rev. No.: A0


File No.: APIS ERS User Guide 3.0.doc Page 7 of 27
APIS Extended Report System User Damatic XD
Guide Marine System

On the left-hand side, you have the APIS modules, like the two databases “MAIN” and “FAST”. Also
modules for connecting to Damatic XD are here (i.e. MAS_FAST, MAS_MAIN), etc.
Normally the user will only work with “Namespace Root” or a SoftPLC module (see own user guide).
“Namespace root” is where all the available signals from the Damatic XD system are listed. By
selecting “Namespace Root” with the mouse, all the signals will appear in the left window. This is not
the signals that are logged, but all the available signals!
Above the listing of the signals, there is a line “Namespace Root 355 items (No Main filter)”. From
the figure, the number of signals is 355 (in normal case this number will be between 5000 and 15000,
according to the Damatic XD system of the ship). “No Main filter” means that all signals are shown in
the list (see later section filtering).
Remember that MAIN database will log signals at 60 seconds interval, and FAST will log at 500 mSec
interval.
3.3 Configuring one signal for logging in database
To configure one signal for logging, you must first locate the signal either using one of the shortcuts or
in the “Namespace Root”. Mark the signal with the mouse, then press right mouse button. You will get
a menu where you can select, “All Tasks”. Select this menu item. A new menu, with the database
names, is shown. Just select the database (Main or Fast) you want to have the signal logged to. Typical
there will for MAS_FAST signals only be possible to select FAST and for MAS_MAIN,
HVAC_MAIN, CARGO_MAIN and HOTEL_MAIN only be possible to select MAIN.

Document No.: <id> Rev. No.: A0


File No.: APIS ERS User Guide 3.0.doc Page 8 of 27
APIS Extended Report System User Damatic XD
Guide Marine System

This enables logging. If you now select the signal again, and choose “All Tasks”, you will see a mark
on the left hand side of i.e. Main. This means that this signal is logged to Main database.

Document No.: <id> Rev. No.: A0


File No.: APIS ERS User Guide 3.0.doc Page 9 of 27
APIS Extended Report System User Damatic XD
Guide Marine System

3.4 Removing one signal from logging and database


If you select one signal from “Namespace Root”, and enter “All Tasks”, you will see the mark on left
hand side of the database it is logged to (if it is set to log). If you now select this database from the
“All Task”-menu, the signal will stop logging to the database. This will also delete the stored history
of signal from the database.
3.5 Configuring several signal for logging in database
To configure several signals at the same time, you also start using one of the shortcuts or the
“Namespace Root” window. Using standard Windows functions, you can select more than one signal
to be logged. Marking one signal with the mouse, then holding the Shift-button down, and marking a
second signal, will select these two signals, plus all that are in between.
Also, holding the Ctrl-key down, you can select several signals at different location, without selecting
those in between.

To enable these signals for logging, place the cursor on one of the selected signals, and press the right
mouse button. Now, select property menu item. You will here find the same items as for the “All
Tasks” menu; Main or Fast. You must choose true/false from the Attribute val.

Document No.: <id> Rev. No.: A0


File No.: APIS ERS User Guide 3.0.doc Page 10 of 27
APIS Extended Report System User Damatic XD
Guide Marine System

3.6 Using filter functions


Since many ships have a lot of signals in the Damatic XD system available for logging, it might be
desirable to narrow the number of signals. There are two ways to use the filter. One way is to use the
“Main item filter settings” and the other way is to use “Column filtering”. Be aware that used filters
inside one of the desktop shortcuts will not be saved. When you close and reopen one of them the filter
is reset to basic. This is done to protect the shortcuts to always work properly. However, you can save
the filters when you are using a filter function in the “Namespace Root”.

3.6.1 Using Wildcards


All types of filtering in the Apis system support wildcards. Typical supported wildcards are the '*' and
'?', substituting any single character and any sub-string respectively. If a given Attribute is not present
with an item, operators '<', '<=' and '<>' will return true, while '>', '<=' or '=' will return false. In
addition, even more advanced wildcards are available, see topic “Using wildcards” in document
“APIS Hive OnlineHelp” (“Start->Programs->APIS->Documents->).
3.6.2 Main item filter settings
In general it is convenient and recommended to always have the “Main item filter” enabled for
“Namespace root”. The “Main item filter setting” dialog is displayed by right-clicking the Namespace
Root node and then selecting Set main item filter.
You can apply up to four filter settings at the same time, which will be combined using a logical AND
operation. Looking at the filter attributes, these are the most common used:

Document No.: <id> Rev. No.: A0


File No.: APIS ERS User Guide 3.0.doc Page 11 of 27
APIS Extended Report System User Damatic XD
Guide Marine System

No Filter This filter is not in use


Description Description. This is similar to Damatic XD description of the signals
ItemID Same as signals or TAG
ProcArea Alarm Group
Main Main database, true or false
Fast Fast database, true or false

Examples: If you want to find out which signals are logged to the Fast database, you enter this kind of
filter, and press the OK button:

If you will filter out all signals that have TEMP in their description, and have a TAG name with
common part 05, you enter this filter:

Remember that filtering is only a tool to narrow the number of signals shown in Namespace root. You
must select/deselect signals for logging to either database afterwards. It is however a good working
policy to always try to reduce the amount of visible signals in “Namespace root” as much as possible.
For instances, when you are working with MAS_FAST, disable all other tags that belongs to other
communication modules. In the figure below it is shown how to disable all tags that include
MAS_MAIN, HVAC_MAIN and ALM_ in the signal name.

Document No.: <id> Rev. No.: A0


File No.: APIS ERS User Guide 3.0.doc Page 12 of 27
APIS Extended Report System User Damatic XD
Guide Marine System

In the desktop shortcuts the “Main item filter” is already used, so normally there is no need to extend
the main filtering in these.

Tip! To quickly see whether or not a main item filter is active, look at the description bar on top of the
list in the “Namespace Root”.
Note! When you specify a main item filter, this filter comes in addition to any filters specified in
Filtered view. Meaning that when a main item filter is specified, the items not satisfying this
filter will not show up anywhere in the APIS environment at all!

3.6.3 Column filtering


In both “Namespace root” and work window opened by desktop shortcuts, there are a filter value at
top of each column letting the user specify a filter value that the items must satisfy to be displayed.

To right of the filter value box on each column, there is a small button like , which let the user
specify the comparison operator to use or filter values from a predefined set of legal values.

Document No.: <id> Rev. No.: A0


File No.: APIS ERS User Guide 3.0.doc Page 13 of 27
APIS Extended Report System User Damatic XD
Guide Marine System

Column types
The behaviour of each column filter is decided by the attribute the column represents.
String attributes
When the attribute of a column is a string attribute, the user may enter any filter value using wildcards.
The filter operator is one of the logical equality operators.
Number attributes
When the attribute of a column is a numeric attribute, the user may enter any numeric filter value, not
using wildcards. The filter operator is one of the logical equality operators.
Boolean attributes
When the attribute of a column is a boolean attribute, the user may enter either true or false, also 1 and
0 is accepted. In this case, the filter operator is just a selector for this:
Enumerated attributes
When the attribute of a column is an enumerated attribute, the user should use filter operator to
selected one of the predefined enumeration values to filter on. (Example columns, Quality, Type and
Rights.)

3.7 Configuring automatically printout of a report


When you have made a report with APIS Jar (see next chapter), you have the possibility to auto print
the report at specific time intervals. On desktop select the shortcut “AutoPrint”. You will here find
some items including the name ShiftReport. Choose one of them and open the property popup by
double click left mouse button or right click and select Properties.
Now there are tree different properties you must change. The table below gives more detail
information.

File Name of the report as seen from Process Explorer (I.e. report01.asp). Must be an
immediate report type (See APIS Jar chapter)
NextTim You type in the first time you want the task to run. The format of date and time is:
e 2002/12/31 12:00:00 PM
Period The printing interval

Document No.: <id> Rev. No.: A0


File No.: APIS ERS User Guide 3.0.doc Page 14 of 27
APIS Extended Report System User Damatic XD
Guide Marine System

4 Making your own reports


This chapter describes how to make your own reports, using APIS Jar.
4.1 Starting APIS Jar
To start the APIS Jar program, double click on the APIS Jar icon.

The program will open like this:

4.2 Creating a report


After opening the APIS Jar, you can select different components from the toolbar to make up your
reports. It is only four components to work with, but they have different kind of options.

Move the mouse cursor over the buttons and a short description of the component appears. By
pressing one of the buttons a new component will be created in the report window.
To select a component to use, just click on the wanted component and it is placed in the report
window. Then you can move the component around on your working sheet, and place it where you
like.

Document No.: <id> Rev. No.: A0


File No.: APIS ERS User Guide 3.0.doc Page 15 of 27
APIS Extended Report System User Damatic XD
Guide Marine System

4.3 Report Types


There are two types of reports: Immediate report and time based report.
4.3.1 Immediate Reports
These reports read the values from the database at the time the report is viewed in the browser. All
calculations are done with the “now-time” as the end time.

Immediate
Report
(1 part)

Endtime

Database

time Time Now


Immediate reports are used together with the auto print function!
4.3.2 Time based Reports
This report type consists of two parts: One time selection and one report part. In the time selection
part, you enter the wanted time from when you will see the values. Then you execute the report to
view.

Document No.: <id> Rev. No.: A0


File No.: APIS ERS User Guide 3.0.doc Page 16 of 27
APIS Extended Report System User Damatic XD
Guide Marine System

Timebased
Report
(2 parts)

Endtime

Database

time Time Now


To create a time based report, you must first create a report consisting of only one object: TreeCntr
In this TreeCntr object, you must enter the name of the report itself (see description of TreeCntr
object).
When you select this first part of the report in Process Explorer, you just enter the wanted end time,
and the second part of the report uses this end time to fetch the values from the databases.

4.4 DynText object


The DynText object is the object with most functions. It has these possibilities:
• Show static text (i.e. header text for reports, comments, etc.)
• Show TAG values
• Show other TAG information like Description and Unit
• Do calculations on two TAGs (Add, subtract, Mean, Max, Min, Etc.)

When you have selected the object, you double click on it to get the property box.

4.4.1 Making headers and comments


If you uncheck the “Dynamic Text”, the TAG field is static, meaning that what you write is what you
will see in the report. This is used for making headings and comments in the report. It is also used for
displaying the TAG name itself.

Document No.: <id> Rev. No.: A0


File No.: APIS ERS User Guide 3.0.doc Page 17 of 27
APIS Extended Report System User Damatic XD
Guide Marine System

You can also select fonts (size of the fonts) from the Font tab. If you want to change the colour of the
text, use the Colors tab. Here you must select “ForeColor” before selecting the colour of the text.
4.4.2 Getting TAG value, description, unit, etc.
To get the value of the TAG in the report, the “Dynamic text” must be checked (this is default). Then,
using the Browse-button, you must select the wanted TAG.

By default, this is just the value of the TAG.


Using the Calculation tab, you can select other attributes, like description and unit. You must select
from the Function combo box the wanted function:
VALUE The value of the TAG (default)
DESCRIPTION Description of the TAG
UNIT The unit of the TAG

Document No.: <id> Rev. No.: A0


File No.: APIS ERS User Guide 3.0.doc Page 18 of 27
APIS Extended Report System User Damatic XD
Guide Marine System

4.4.3 MAX, MIN, STD.DEV, MEAN


To do calculation like minimum, maximum, mean and standard deviation over a time period, select the
TAG as described above. Then, using the Calculation tab, select the wanted function. In the Period
field, select the time period the calculation shall be executed on (I.e. 2 hours).

4.4.4 ADD, MULTIPLY, SUBTRACT and DIVIDE


To do calculation like add, subtract, multiply and divide over a time period, you must select two
TAGs. These two TAGs are select from the Calculation tab (Tag 1 and Tag 2). Then, select the wanted
function. In the Period field, select the time period the calculation shall be executed on (I.e. 2 hours).
You must enter ENDTIME in the “(End) Time” field).
The calculation is done taking the value at the endtime for the first TAG, then the value for the second
TAG is taken at the time (endtime – Period). You can select the same TAG for Tag 1 and Tag 2. This
is used when calculating consumption over a period of time (using SUB).

Document No.: <id> Rev. No.: A0


File No.: APIS ERS User Guide 3.0.doc Page 19 of 27
APIS Extended Report System User Damatic XD
Guide Marine System

4.5 Graph Object


The graph object is a object for displaying trend curves or tables. You can place this in any report,

immediate or time based.


Double click on the object, and you will get the properties for this object.

In the color tab, you can select colors for background and grid.
In the X-axis tab, you can select how far back the in database history you will see the trend(s).
Selecting “Show values in table”, will turn the object into a table, showing values with timestamp and
values, instead of the graph.
In the Tags tab, you select the TAGs for the trend.

Selecting the Add button, you will get the “Tag description” dialog box. Check Fixed radio button.
Now you can select any TAG from the databases using the Browse button.

Document No.: <id> Rev. No.: A0


File No.: APIS ERS User Guide 3.0.doc Page 20 of 27
APIS Extended Report System User Damatic XD
Guide Marine System

4.6 Bargraph Object


This object displays the value of the TAG as a bragraph. Select the object, and place it in any report.

Double click on the object, and you will get property page for it.

Using the Browse button, you can select any TAG from the databases.
You must enter the wanted range of signals, in the Min and Max fields. “Show tag name”, will display
the TAG name in conjunction with the object. “Show tag value” will display the value together with
the object. “Horisontal” will turn the bargraph 90 degrees (default is a vertical bargraph).
4.7 TreeCntrl Object
This object is not part of normal report. It is only used for time based reports. You must create a new

report, place this object in this report, and enter the property box for this by double clicking on it.

Document No.: <id> Rev. No.: A0


File No.: APIS ERS User Guide 3.0.doc Page 21 of 27
APIS Extended Report System User Damatic XD
Guide Marine System

In the “Action URL” field, enter the name of the report part of the time based report (i.e.
report01a.asp). You must have the .asp extension.
Save this time part with name i.e. report01, and the report part as report01a, so you can see the
connection between those two.
4.8 Creating Time Based Reports
The difference between immediate and time based reports is that time based reports consist of two
parts: One time selection part, and one report part. The report part is the same for the immediate
reports.

4.8.1 Time selection part


This is described under TreeCntrl chapter.
4.8.2 Report part
This part is build up using the other objects, just as a immediate report.

Document No.: <id> Rev. No.: A0


File No.: APIS ERS User Guide 3.0.doc Page 22 of 27
APIS Extended Report System User Damatic XD
Guide Marine System

5 Daily use of APIS ERS


This chapter describes the daily use of APIS ERS. This chapter contains information on how to
operate the system after configuration
5.1 Starting APIS Process Explorer
Daily use of APIS ERS is done through an Internet Explorer web-browser. This web-browser is
available on the APIS Server, but also on selected DNA OPS and XDS in the Damatic system.
To start from the APIS Server, double click on the Internet Explorer Icon. The program is called APIS
Process Explorer.
You will have this start page:

On the left hand side is a menu for the functions available in APIS Process Explorer.
Home This will bring you to the start page (Shown in the figure above)
Help Help support system
Trend Fixed trend pages, XY-plot, Normal trend, Tables and Tag list
Alarms View alarms from Damatic XD system
User Reports User defined reports, made with APIS Jar

Document No.: <id> Rev. No.: A0


File No.: APIS ERS User Guide 3.0.doc Page 23 of 27
APIS Extended Report System User Damatic XD
Guide Marine System

5.1.1 Trend

Selecting the trend menu item, you will have these options:

XY-plot Plots freely selectable signals against each other. One signal is on the X-
axis and one is on the Y-axis.
Trend “Normal” trend function. Displays the selected signal(s) in a trend view.
Option for normalisation of axis for comparing two signals with
different ranges.
Tag List Selects signals for immediate view of present value
Table Select signals for viewing in table

Document No.: <id> Rev. No.: A0


File No.: APIS ERS User Guide 3.0.doc Page 24 of 27
APIS Extended Report System User Damatic XD
Guide Marine System

5.1.2 Trend
Trend pages look like this:

You must press “APIS”, to have a list over the signals currently logged in the databases. You must
then open one of the database (Main or Fast), to view their content.
Select any signal you will display.
If you have chosen two signals, or more, and these signals have different ranges, it might be desirable
to view these signals in same scale. Just left click the y-axis you want to merge, and the right click. A
popup will then give you the possibility to “Merge Axis”.

If you want to save your trend configuration (signals and axes), do this by right click “Workspaces”,
select “New Workspace”, type a name of it and press “OK” to save. When you in a later time want to
call back the trend, press “Workspaces” and locate your saved trend. You can also add new folders to
make it easier to sort and locate you trends.

Document No.: <id> Rev. No.: A0


File No.: APIS ERS User Guide 3.0.doc Page 25 of 27
APIS Extended Report System User Damatic XD
Guide Marine System

5.1.3 Alarm page


Selecting the Alarm menu items will give you this application:

This page enables you to work with the alarm history of the ship. The alarm database contains all
alarms generated from Damatic XD, kept for one year. If the Damatic XD system contains more than
one alarm station (i.e. machinery and HVAC / HOTEL), alarms from both stations are saved to the
database.
In this example, the ship has two alarm stations, MAS and HOTEL.
Explanation of the elements in the page:
Endtime: This is the end time of your query
Period: The time interval before end time. I.e. if your end time 2000-03-03
09:00:00, and Period is 4 hours, you will have all alarms in the interval
from 05:00 to 09:00 at 2000-03-03
Tag name You can filter out specific alarms using a TAG filter. I.e. entering
*43TEMP*, will only show TAGs that contains 43TEMP
Description Filter for descriptive text. If you enter PRESSURE, you will only get
the TAG with PRESSURE in the alarm text area.
Alarm Enter alarm group, I.e. *P01*. This will only show you the alarms
Group from this group.

Note: Tag name, Description and Alarm Group can be combined.


Alarms from means you can select alarm from only MAS, or only HOTEL, or both (MAS &
HOTEL).
Sorting is done with newest alarm first, or oldest alarm first.
Then, press “View Alarms” for the result.

Document No.: <id> Rev. No.: A0


File No.: APIS ERS User Guide 3.0.doc Page 26 of 27
APIS Extended Report System User Damatic XD
Guide Marine System

5.2 Maintenance

5.2.1 Backup to tape


The system contains basically of three databases: Main, Fast and the alarm history. These three
databases are backed up to tape for later retrieval and/or restore of the AERS databases.
The tape drive is located in the APIS server PC. The backup is a full backup of the databases + some
register settings for the APIS system.
5.2.2 Backup procedure
The tape should be replaced with another tape once every week. Each month, the tape should be
removed from the tape rolling, and stored for archiving. This means that after one year, the ship will
have twelve archived tapes for the ship. Proper naming of the tape with date of backup, name of ship
and system is recommended.
Archived tapes should be disabled for recording!

Document No.: <id> Rev. No.: A0


File No.: APIS ERS User Guide 3.0.doc Page 27 of 27

You might also like